Line Distance Protection REL670: Product Guide

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 150

R E L I O N ® 670 SERIES

Line distance protection REL670


Version 2.2
Product guide
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Contents

1. Application..................................................................... 3 15. Monitoring................................................................... 42


2. Available functions........................................................10 16. Metering......................................................................44
3. Differential protection....................................................25 17. Human machine interface............................................44
4. Impedance protection.................................................. 26 18. Basic IED functions..................................................... 45
5. Wide area measurement system...................................31 19. Ethernet...................................................................... 45
6. Current protection........................................................ 31 20. Station communication ...............................................45
7. Voltage protection........................................................ 33 21. Remote communication.............................................. 47
8. Frequency protection....................................................34 22. Hardware description.................................................. 48
9. Multipurpose protection................................................34 23. Connection diagrams.................................................. 51
10. General calculation...................................................... 34 24. Technical data.............................................................52
11. Secondary system supervision.................................... 35 25. Ordering for customized IED......................................127
12. Control........................................................................ 35 26. Ordering for pre-configured IED.................................139
13. Scheme communication..............................................37 27. Ordering for Accessories........................................... 145
14. Logic...........................................................................39

Disclaimer

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors
that may appear in this document. Drawings and diagrams are not binding.
© Copyright 2017 ABB.
All rights reserved.
Trademarks

ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
2 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2 Issued: May 2017
Revision: -

1. Application depending on other functionality included in the IED. Each MU


The Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) is used for the protection, has eight analogue channels, normally four currents and four
control and monitoring of overhead lines and cables in solidly, voltages. Conventional and Merging Unit channels can be
impedance earthed or isolated networks. The IED can be used mixed freely in the application.
up to the high voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection of
heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the Logic is prepared with a graphical tool. The advanced logic
requirement for tripping is one-, two- and/or three-phase. The capability allows special applications such as automatic
IED is also suitable as back-up protection of power opening of disconnectors in multi-breaker arrangements,
transformers, reactors and so on. closing of breaker rings, load transfer logics and so on. The
graphical configuration tool with delay mode, ensures simple
Distance protection with quadrilateral or mho characteristics is and fast testing and commissioning.
available. The full scheme distance protection provides
protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low Disturbance recorder and fault locator are available to allow
requirement on remote end communication. The six zones have independent post-fault analysis after primary disturbances.
fully independent measuring and setting which gives high
Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient way to test
flexibility for all types of lines. Load encroachment and adaptive
wiring in substations as well as testing configuration logic in the
reach compensation are included.
IEDs. Basically it means that all binary inputs and outputs on the
The modern technical solution offers fast operating time of IED I/O modules (BOM, BIM, IOM & SOM) can be forced to
typically less than one cycle. arbitrary values.

The IED also includes an alternative for use on impedance Central Account Management is an authentication
earthed or isolated networks. It includes phase preference logic infrastructure that offers a secure solution for enforcing access
to select and trip only one line at cross-country faults. control to IEDs and other systems within a substation. This
incorporates management of user accounts, roles and
The autorecloser for single-, two-, and/or three-phase tripping certificates and the distribution of such, a procedure completely
and autoreclosing includes priority features for multi-breaker transparent to the user.
arrangements. It co-operates with the synchrocheck function
with high-speed or delayed reclosing. Flexible Product Naming allows the customer to use an IED-
vendor independent IEC 61850 model of the IED. This
A high impedance differential protection can be used to protect customer model will be used as the IEC 61850 data model, but
T-feeders or line reactors. all other aspects of the IED will remain unchanged (e.g., names
on the local HMI and names in the tools). This offers significant
High set instantaneous phase and earth overcurrent, four step flexibility to adapt the IED to the customers' system and
directional or non-directional delayed phase and earth standard solution.
overcurrent, sensitive earth fault for not direct earthed systems,
thermal overload and two step under and overvoltage Communication via optical connections ensures immunity
protection are examples of the available functions allowing the against disturbances.
user to fulfill any application requirement.
Four packages have been defined for the following
The distance phase and earth fault protection, and the applications:
directional earth overcurrent protection can communicate with
remote end in any teleprotection communication scheme. With • Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, isolated or high
the included remote communication, following the IEEE C37.94 impedance earthed systems (A41)
standard, up to 192 channels for intertrip and binary signals are • Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping (A42)
available per LDCM communication module in the • Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping (B42)
communication between the IEDs. • Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, with PMU (D42)

The IED can also be provided with full bay control and Optional functions are not configured but a maximum
interlocking functionality including co-operation with the configuration with all optional functions are available as
synchrocheck function to allow integration of the main or back- template in the application configuration tool. Analog inputs
up control. and binary input/output signals are pre-defined for basic use.
Other signals may be required by each particular application.
Out of Step function is available to separate power system
sections close to electrical centre at occurring out of step. Add binary I/O boards as required for the application when
ordering.
The IED can be used in applications with IEC/UCA
61850-9-2LE process bus with up to eight merging units (MU)

ABB 3
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Description of configuration A41

WA1
REL670 A41 – Single breaker with three phase tripping for
WA2 high ohmic and resonance earthed systems 12AI (6I+6U)

WA2_VT

QB1 QB2 3 Control 63 71 MET UN


S XCBR S SIMG S SIML VN MMXU
WA1_VT

MET UN 94 1→0
1->0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC
VN MMXU SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

QA1
21 Z< 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
PPL2 PHIZ ZMF PDIS PH PIOC BRC PTOC

LINE_CT Control
Control
Control 68 Zpsb 50BF 3I>BF 26 θ>
SS SCBR
SCBR
S SCBR ZCLC PSCH ZM RPSB CC RBRF LC PTTR

U>/I< MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) 67N IN>


ZCV PSOF FUF SPVC CV MMXN OC4 PTOC SDE PSDE

W/
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET MET Isqi MET I
QB9 Varh
DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR C MSQI C MMXU
QC9

LINE_VT

MET U MET Usqi MET UN 27 3U<


V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU LOV PTUV

Other Functions available from the function library


52PD PD 2(I>/U<) 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>> 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 59 2(3U>) Zpsl 3 Control
CC PDSC CV GAPC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OV2 PTOV PSL PSCH Q CBAY

3I>ST
59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 27 2(3U<) 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85
B
ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC UV2 PTUV VR PVOC ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH

Optional Functions
3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 60 Ud>
PMU REP Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI S XSWI VD SPVC

IEC16000195-1-en.vsd
IEC16000195 V1 EN

Figure 1. Configuration diagram for configuration A41

4 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Description of configuration A42

WA1
REL670 A42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping
WA2 12AI (6I+6U)

WA2_VT

QB1 QB2 3 Control


Control
Control 63 71 MET UN
S
SSXCBR
SCBR
SCBR S SIMG S SIML VN MMXU
WA1_VT

MET UN 94 1→0
1->0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC
VN MMXU SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

85 85 68 Zpsb 21 Z<
QA1
ZCRW PSCH ZC PSCH ZM RPSB ZMF PDIS

46 Iub> 50 3I>> 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>)


BRC PTOC PH PIOC EF PIOC EF4 PTOC

LINE_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD
SSCBR
S
S SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC

MET P/Q U>/I< 51_67 4(3I>) 26 θ>


CV MMXN ZCV PSOF FUF SPVC OC4 PTOC LC PTTR

MET W/Varh MET Isqi MET I


QB9
ETP MMTR C MSQI C MMXU
QC9
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL 85 85 27 3U<
LINE_VT DRP RDRE LMB RFLO EC PSCH ECRW PSCH LOV PTUV

MET U MET Usqi MET UN 27 2(3U<) 59 2(3U>)


V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV

Other Functions available from the function library


87 INd/I 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 78 Ucos Zpsl 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>
CCS SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OOS PPAM PSL PSCH Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF

81 f> 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)


SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV VR PVOC ZCLC PSCH

Optional Functions
2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos 3 Control 3 Control
CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH PMU REP PSP PPAM Q CRSV S CILO

3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 85 85


S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH

IEC16000196-1-en.vsd
IEC16000196 V1 EN

Figure 2. Configuration diagram for configuration A42

ABB 5
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Description of configuration B42

WA1
REL670 B42 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT

WA1_CT Control
Control 52PD PD MET UN
Control 50BF 3I>BF
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU
Σ
Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD
WA1_QA1 SS SCBR
SCBR
S SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC

3 Control
Control
Control 63 71
S
SSXCBR
SCBR
SCBR S SIMG S SIML
WA1_QB6
MET I MET Isqi 46 Iub> 50STB 3I>STB 26 θ>
3I>STB
LINE1_QB9 C MMXU C MSQI BRC PTOC STB PTOC LC PTTR
LINE1_VT

MET P/Q 68 Zpsb 21 Z< U>/I<


CV MMXN ZM RPSB ZMF PDIS ZCV PSOF FUF SPVC

QB61 MET W/Varh 21FL FL DFR/SER DR


ETP MMTR LMB RFLO DRP RDRE

85 51_67 4(3I>) 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50 3I>> 50N IN>>


TIE_QA1 ZC PSCH OC4 PTOC EF4 PTOC PH PIOC EF PIOC

TIE_CT
85 85 85 27 3U<
ZCRW PSCH EC PSCH ECRW PSCH LOV PTUV

MET U MET UN MET Usqi 27 2(3U<) 59 2(3U>)


QB62 V MMXU VN MMXU V MSQI UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV

LINE2_QB9
MET UN
LINE2_VT VN MMXU

WA2_VT MET UN 94
94 1→0
1→0 79
79 0→1 25 SC
25 SC/VC
WA2_QB6 5(0→1)
VN MMXU SMP
SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES
SESRSYN
RSYN

WA2_QA1 Other Functions available from the function library


87 INd/I 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 78 Ucos Zpsl 3 Control
CCS SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OOS PPAM PSL PSCH Q CBAY

59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)


QB2
ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF VDC PTOV VR PVOC

WA2 ZCLC PSCH

Optional Functions

2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f>


CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH PMU REP

78 Ucos 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control


PSP PPAM Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI

60 Ud> 85 85
VD SPVC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH
IEC16000197-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000197 V1 EN

Figure 3. Configuration diagram for configuration B42

6 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Description of configuration D42

WA1
REL670 D42 – Single breaker with single or three phase
WA2 tripping with PMU functionality 12AI (6I+6U)

` Pha sor data

81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f> IEEE Std 1344

SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF PMU REP IEEE Std C37.118

WA2_VT

QB1 QB2 3 Control


Control
Control 63 71 MET UN
S
SSXCBR
SCBR
SCBR S SIMG S SIML VN MMXU
WA1_VT

MET UN 94 1→0
1->0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC
VN MMXU SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

85 85 68 Zpsb 21 Z<
QA1
ZCRW PSCH ZC PSCH ZM RPSB ZMF PDIS

46 Iub> 50 3I>> 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>)


BRC PTOC PH PIOC EF PIOC EF4 PTOC

LINE_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD
SSCBR
S
S SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC

MET P/Q U>/I< 51_67 4(3I>) 26 θ>


CV MMXN ZCV PSOF FUF SPVC OC4 PTOC LC PTTR

MET W/Varh MET Isqi MET I


QB9
ETP MMTR C MSQI C MMXU
QC9
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL 85 85 27 3U<
LINE_VT DRP RDRE LMB RFLO EC PSCH ECRW PSCH LOV PTUV

MET U MET Usqi MET UN 27 2(3U<) 59 2(3U>)


V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV

Other Functions available from the function library


87 INd/I 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 78 Ucos Zpsl 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>
CCS SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OOS PPAM PSL PSCH Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV STB PTOC VDC PTOV

51V 2(I>/U<)
VR PVOC ZCLC PSCH

Optional Functions
2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control
CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH PSP PPAM Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI

67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 85 85


SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH

IEC16000198-1-en.vsdx

IEC16000198 V1 EN

Figure 4. Configuration diagram for configuration D42

ABB 7
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

BUS B

BUS A

TRIP BUSBAR

79 25
CLOSE
O->I SC/VC
94/86
TRIP
I->O

50BF
3I>

21
Z<
5
5

51/67
3I>
4
4
51N/67N
IN>
4
4
59
3U>
2
2
27
3U< en05000276.vsd
2
2
IEC05000276-1 V1 EN

Figure 5. The single breaker packages for single- and three phase tripping typical arrangement for one protection sub-system is shown here.

8 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

BUS A

TRIP BUSBAR & CB2

79 25
CLOSE
O->I SC/VC

94/86
CB1
TRIP
I->O 79 25

O->I SC/VC

50BF
21 3I>
S 50BF TRIP
Z<
5 3I> CB1/3
94/86
5
I->O

CLOSE
59 51/67

TRIP
3U> 3I>
2 4
2 4
27 51N/67N CB2
3U< IN>
2 4
2 4

IEC05000317-2-en.vsd
IEC05000317 V2 EN

Figure 6. The multi breaker packages for single- and three phase tripping typical arrangement for one protection sub-system is shown here.
Auto-reclose, Synchrocheck and Breaker failure functions are included for each of the two breakers.

The basic delivery includes one binary input module and one specific to the system, object or application. Optional functions
binary output module, which is sufficient for the default and optional IO ordered will not be configured at delivery. It
configured IO to trip and close circuit breaker. All IEDs can be should be noted that the standard only includes one binary
reconfigured with the help of the application configuration tool input and one binary output module and only the key functions
in PCM600. The IED can be adapted to special applications and such as tripping are connected to the outputs in the signal
special logic can be developed, such as logic for automatic matrix tool. The required total IO must be calculated and
opening of disconnectors and closing of ring bays, automatic specified at ordering.
load transfer from one busbar to the other, and so on.
The configurations are as far as found necessary provided with
The basic IED configuration is provided with the signal matrix, application comments to explain why the signals have been
single line diagram and the application configuration prepared connected in the special way. On request, ABB is available to
for the functions included in the product by default. All support the re-configuration work, either directly or to do the
parameters should be verified by the customer, since these are design checking.

ABB 9
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

2. Available functions not exposed to the user or do not need to be


configured are not described in this manual.
The following tables list all the functions
available in the IED. Those functions that are

Main protection functions

Table 1. Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances


0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

10 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance


function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

Differential protection

HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential protection, single phase 0-3 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02

LDRGFC 11REL Additional security logic for differential protection 0-1

Impedance protection

ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic 0-5


ZMQAPDIS

ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral 0-2

ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic 0-6


ZMCAPDIS for series compensated lines

ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series 0-2


compensation

FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed 0-2


angle

ZMHPDIS 21 Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic 0-5

ZMMPDIS, 21 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for 0-5


ZMMAPDIS earth faults

ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element for mho characteristic 0-2

ZDARDIR Additional distance protection directional function for 0-2


earth faults

ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision logic 0-1

FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment 0-2

ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic 0-5


ZMRAPDIS separate Ph-Ph and Ph-E settings

FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with 0-2


settable angle

ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection, quad and mho 0-2 1 1 1 1


characteristic

ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection for series comp. lines, 0-2
quad and mho characteristic

PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1

PPL2PHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1 1

ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0-1 1 1 1 1

PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1 1 1 1 1

PSPPPAM 78 Poleslip/out-of-step protection 0-2 1-B24 1-B24 1-B24

OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0-1 1 1 1

ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current 1 1 1 1 1


based

ABB 11
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Back-up protection functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance


function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

Current protection

PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 0-3 1 1 1 1

OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps 0-3 1 1 1 1

EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 0-3 1 1 1 1

EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent protection, four 0-3 1 1 1 1


67N2) steps

NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase sequence 0-2 1 1 1 1


overcurrent protection

SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power 0-1 1 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
protection

LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, 0-2 1 1 1 1


Celsius

LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, 0-2 1 1 1 1


Fahrenheit

CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-2 1 1 2 1

STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-2 1 1 1B 1


1-B27

CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-2 1 1 2 1

GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-2 1-C39 1-C39 1-C39

GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-2 1-C39 1-C39 1-C39

BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1 1 1 1 1

VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent protection 0-3 1 1 1 1

Voltage protection

UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1

OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1

ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1

OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-1 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03

VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2 2 2 2

LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1 1 1 1 1

PAPGAPC 27 Radial feeder protection 0-1

Frequency protection

SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B


3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04

12 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance


function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B


3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04

SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B


3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04

Multipurpose protection

CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-4 1 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01

General calculation

SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

ABB 13
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Control and monitoring functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance


function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

Control

SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing 0-2 1 1 2 1

SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-4 1 1B 2B 1B


1-H04 2-H05 1-H04

APC10 3 Control functionality for a single bay, max 10 objects 0-1 1-H37 1-H37 1-H37
(1CB), including interlocking (see Table 3)

APC15 3 Control functionality for a single bay, max 15 objects 0-1 1-H38
(2CB), including interlocking (see Table 4)

QCBAY Bay control 1 1 1 1 1

LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 1 1 1 1 1

LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1 1 1 1 1

SXCBR Circuit breaker 6 3 3 6 3

SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI 15 15 15 15 15


presentation

VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30 30 30 30 30

DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double Point 16 16 16 16 16


indication

SPC8GAPC Single point generic control function 8 signals 5 5 5 5 5

AUTOBITS Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0 3 3 3 3 3

SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4 4 4 4 4

I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1

I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 50 50 50 50 50

I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 50 50 50 50 50


60870-5-103

I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103 50 50 50 50 50

I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1

I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 4 4 4 4 4

Secondary system
supervision

CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-2 1 2 1

FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-3 1 3 3 3

VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference 0-2 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03

Logic

SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 12 12 12 12 12

SMAGAPC General start matrix block 12 12 12 12 12

STARTCOMB Start combinator 32 32 32 32 32

14 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance


function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12

ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5

WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5 5

INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5 5 5 5

AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 2) 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR

ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T (see Table 5) 0-1


INDCOMBSPQT,
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT

AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package (see Table 6) 0-1


LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR

FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1 1

B16I Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit 18 18 18 18 18

BTIGAPC Boolean to integer conversion with logical node 16 16 16 16 16


representation, 16 bit

IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 18 18 18 18

ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node 16 16 16 16 16


representation

TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and 12 12 12 12 12


overflow supervision

INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 30 30 30 30 30

REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 30 30 30 30 30

ABB 15
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 2. Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances

AND 280

GATE 40

INV 420

LLD 40

OR 298

PULSETIMER 40

RSMEMORY 40

SRMEMORY 40

TIMERSET 60

XOR 40

Table 3. Number of function instances in APC10

Function name Function description Total number of instances

SCILO Interlocking 10

BB_ES 3

A1A2_BS 2

A1A2_DC 3

ABC_BC 1

BH_CONN 1

BH_LINE_A 1

BH_LINE_B 1

DB_BUS_A 1

DB_BUS_B 1

DB_LINE 1

ABC_LINE 1

AB_TRAFO 1

SCSWI Switch controller 10

SXSWI Circuit switch 9

QCRSV Apparatus control 2

RESIN1 1

RESIN2 59

POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10

XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via 12


GOOSE

GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a switching 12


device

16 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 4. Number of function instances in APC15

Function name Function description Total number of instances

SCILO Interlocking 15

BB_ES 3

A1A2_BS 2

A1A2_DC 3

ABC_BC 1

BH_CONN 1

BH_LINE_A 1

BH_LINE_B 1

DB_BUS_A 1

DB_BUS_B 1

DB_LINE 1

ABC_LINE 1

AB_TRAFO 1

SCSWI Switch controller 15

SXSWI Circuit switch 14

QCRSV Apparatus control 2

RESIN1 1

RESIN2 59

POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 15

XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via 20


GOOSE

GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a switching 20


device

Table 5. Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances

ANDQT 120

INDCOMBSPQT 20

INDEXTSPQT 20

INVALIDQT 22

INVERTERQT 120

ORQT 120

PULSETIMERQT 40

RSMEMORYQT 40

SRMEMORYQT 40

TIMERSETQT 40

XORQT 40

ABB 17
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 6. Total number of instances for extended logic package

Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances

AND 180

GATE 49

INV 180

LLD 49

OR 180

PULSETIMER 89

RSMEMORY 40

SLGAPC 74

SRMEMORY 130

TIMERSET 109

VSGAPC 120

XOR 89

18 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance


function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

Monitoring

CVMMXN Power system measurement 6 6 6 6 6

CMMXU Current measurement 10 10 10 10 10

VMMXU Voltage measurement phase-phase 6 6 6 6 6

CMSQI Current sequence measurement 6 6 6 6 6

VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 6 6 6 6 6

VNMMXU Voltage measurement phase-earth 6 6 6 6 6

AISVBAS General service value presentation of analog inputs 1 1 1 1 1

EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20

DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1


A1RADR-
A4RADR,
B1RBDR-
B22RBDR

SPGAPC Generic communication function for Single Point 64 64 64 64 64


indication

SP16GAPC Generic communication function for Single Point 16 16 16 16 16


indication 16 inputs

MVGAPC Generic communication function for measured values 24 24 24 24 24

BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3 3 3 3

RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66 66 66 66 66

SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for gas medium 21 21 21 21 21

SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for liquid medium 3 3 3 3 3

SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 0-6 3 3 6 3

LMBRFLO Fault locator 1 1 1 1 1

I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1

I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 3 3 3 3 3

I103AR Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1

I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1

I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1

I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1

I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1

I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 20 20 20 20 20

L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30 30 30 30 30

TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6 6 6 6 6

ABB 19
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance


function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

Metering

PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16

ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand handling 6 6 6 6 6

20 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Communication

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Line Distance


name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

Station communication

LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1

ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1

HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1 1

RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 1

DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1 1 1 1 1

CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1

CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1


CH3TCP, CH4TCP

CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication 1 1 1 1 1


protocol

MSTSER DNP3.0 serial master 1 1 1 1 1

MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1


MST2TCP,
MST3TCP, MST4TCP

DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and EIA-485 1 1 1 1 1


communication protocol

IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1 1 1 1 1

GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59 59 59 59 59

GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 16 16 16

GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64 64 64 64 64

GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32 32 32 32 32

GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60 60 60 60 60

GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 64 64 64 64 64

MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND

OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication 1 1 1 1 1

RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 1 1 1 1 1

AGSAL Generic security application component 1 1 1 1 1

LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1

SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1

LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1 1

PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1 1 1 1 1

SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols 1 1 1 1 1


such as DNP3 and IEC103

FSTACCS Field service tool access 1 1 1 1 1


ABB 21
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Line Distance


name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 8 merging 0-1 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30
units

ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1

ALTRK Service tracking 1 1 1 1 1

PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 0-1 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23

HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 0-1 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24

PMUCONF, Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors (see Table 7) 0-1 1-P32 1-P32 1-P32 1
PMUREPORT,
PHASORREPORT1,
ANALOGREPORT1
BINARYREPORT1,
SMAI1 - SMAI12
3PHSUM
PMUSTATUS

PTP Precision time protocol 1 1 1 1 1

FRONTSTATUS Access point diagnostic for front Ethernet port 1 1 1 1 1

SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non-redundant Ethernet 6 6 6 6 6


port

RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant Ethernet ports 3 3 3 3 3

DHCP DHCP configuration for front access point 1 1 1 1 1

QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96 96 96 96 96

Remote communication

BinSignRec1_1 Binary signal transfer receive 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignRec1_2
BinSignReceive2

BinSignTrans1_1 Binary signal transfer transmit 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignTrans1_2
BinSignTransm2

BinSigRec1_12M Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit receive/transmit 3 3 3 3 3


BinSigRec1_22M
BinSigTran1_12M
BinSigTran1_22M

LDCMTRN Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1 1 1 1 1

LDCMTRN_2M Transmission of analog data from LDCM, 2Mbit 6 6 6 6 6

LDCMRecBinStat1 Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
LDCMRecBinStat2
LDCMRecBinStat3

LDCMRecBinS2_2M Receive binary status from LDCM, 2Mbit 3 3 3 3 3

LDCMRecBinS3_2M Receive binary status from remote LDCM, 2Mbit 3 3 3 3 3

Scheme communication

ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic with delta based 0-2 1 1 1 1


blocking scheme signal transmit

22 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Line Distance


name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670 (A42)
REL670
(Customized)

ZC1PPSCH 85 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05
distance protection

ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for 0-2 1 1 1 1


distance protection

ZC1WPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05
segregated communication

ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1 1 1 1

ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent 0-1 1 1 1


protection

ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual 0-1 1 1 1
overcurrent protection

DTT Direct transfer trip 0-1

Table 7. Number of function instances in Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors

Function name Function description Number of instances

PMUCONF Configuration parameters for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1

PMUREPORT Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 1

PHASORREPORT1 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, phasors 1-8 1

ANALOGREPORT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, analogs 1-8 1

BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, binary 1-8 1

SMAI1–SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 1

3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 6

PMUSTATUS Diagnostics for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1

ABB 23
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Basic IED functions

Table 8. Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description


name

INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list

TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module

BININPUT, SYNCHCAN, Time synchronization


SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA

PTP Precision time protocol

TIMEZONE Time synchronization

IRIG-B Time synchronization

SETGRPS Number of setting groups

ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups

TESTMODE Test mode functionality

CHNGLCK Change lock function

SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs

SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs

SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs

SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs

3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase

ATHSTAT Authority status

ATHCHCK Authority check

AUTHMAN Authority management

FTPACCS FTP access with password

GBASVAL Global base values for settings

ALTMS Time master supervision

ALTIM Time management

COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic

24 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 9. Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description


name

LHMICTRL Local HMI signals

LANGUAGE Local human machine language

SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior

FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600


FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5

LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI

OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys

GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module


GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

3. Differential protection • Phase-to-phase current variation


• Zero sequence current criterion
High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF • Low voltage criterion
High impedance differential protection, single phase (HZPDIF) • Low current criterion
functions can be used when the involved CT cores have the
same turns ratio and similar magnetizing characteristics. It Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as
utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by wiring. input and it calculates the variation using the sampling value
Actually all CT secondary circuits which are involved in the based algorithm. Phase-to-phase current variation function is
differential scheme are connected in parallel. External series major one to fulfill the objectives of the startup element.
resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which are both
mounted externally to the IED, are also required. Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current as
input. It increases the security of protection during the high
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED impedance fault conditions.
accessories in the Product Guide.
Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase-to-
HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, phase voltages as inputs. It increases the security of protection
reactors, motors, auto-transformers, capacitor banks and so when the three-phase fault occurred on the weak end side.
on. One such function block is used for a high-impedance
restricted earth fault protection. Three such function blocks are Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and it
used to form three-phase, phase-segregated differential increases the dependability during the switch onto fault case of
protection. unloaded line.

Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed
Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) through the line and protection is not working correctly.
can help the security of the protection especially when the
Features:
communication system is in abnormal status or for example
when there is unspecified asymmetry in the communication link.
It helps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the
protection. LDRGFC is more sensitive than the main protection
logic to always release operation for all faults detected by the
differential function. LDRGFC consists of four sub functions:

ABB 25
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

• Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents
abnormal status of the protected system overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-to-earth
• Startup element does not influence the operation speed of faults on heavily loaded power lines.
main protection
• Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high The distance protection zones can operate independently of
impedance faults and three phase fault on weak side each other in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional
• It is possible to block the each sub function of startup mode. This makes them suitable, together with different
element communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and
• Startup signal has a settable pulse time cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel
lines, multi-terminal lines.

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for


4. Impedance protection series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic
product variant) zone full scheme protection with three fault
ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS
loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on
to-earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual
product variant) zone full scheme protection function with three
settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for
for use on overhead lines and cables of different types and
phase-to-earth faults for each of the independent zones.
lengths.
Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach
gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer Quadrilateral characteristic is available.
connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and
lengths. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (ZMCPDIS) function has functionality for
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic load encroachment which increases the possibility to detect
(ZMQPDIS) together with Phase selection with load high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
encroachment (FDPSPDIS) has functionality for load
encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure 7. X

Forward
X
operation

Forward
operation

R Reverse
operation

Reverse
operation
en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 8. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load


en05000034.vsd encroachment function activated
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 7. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase


selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS The independent measurement of impedance for each fault
activated loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase
selection makes the function suitable in applications with single
phase auto-reclosing.
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault
loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in phase Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the
selection makes the function suitable in applications with quadrilateral function prevents overreaching of zone1 at load
single-phase autoreclosing.

26 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

exporting end at phase to earth-faults on heavily loaded power Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the
lines. function.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of Adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching
each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines, see
mode. This makes them suitable, together with different Figure 9.
communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and
cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel Load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching at phase-
lines, multi-terminal lines. to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines, see Figure 9. This
Load encroachment characteristic is taken from the FMPSPDIS
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle function.
FDPSPDIS
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases
jX
close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations,
the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is
reduced, for example, difficulties to get permission to build new
power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the Operation area Operation area

different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and


autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this
matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed R
angle (FDPSPDIS) is designed to accurately select the proper
fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type. Operation area

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission


No operation area No operation area
networks may make fault resistance coverage difficult to
achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has a built-in algorithm for load
IEC07000117-2-en.vsd
encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the IEC07000117 V2 EN

resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring


Figure 9. Load encroachment influence on the offset mho
zones without interfering with the load. characteristic

The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives


also important information about faulty phase(s), which can be The distance protection zones can operate, independent of
used for fault analysis. each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional
mode (offset). This makes them suitable, together with different
A current-based phase selection is also included. The
communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and
measuring elements continuously measure three phase
cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel
currents and the residual current and, compare them with the
lines, multi-terminal lines and so on.
set values.
The integrated control and monitoring functions offer effective
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic
solutions for operating and monitoring all types of transmission
ZMHPDIS
and sub-transmission lines.
The numerical mho line distance protection is an up to five
(depending on product variant) zone full scheme protection of Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
short circuit and earth faults. ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on
The zones have fully independent measuring and settings,
product variant) zone full scheme protection function with three
which gives high flexibility for all types of lines. Each zone is an
fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each of the independent
individual function block available for independent configuration
zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive
in ACT.
reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of
The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is different types and lengths.
suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-
The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth
terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is one-, two-
fault functions have functionality for load encroachment, which
and/or three-pole.
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loaded lines , see Figure 7.
loop together with a sensitive and reliable phase selection
makes the function suitable in applications with single phase
autoreclosing.
ABB 27
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

The phase selection function is design to accurately select the


X proper fault loop(s) in the distance function dependent on the
fault type.
Forward
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission
operation
networks may in some cases interfere with the distance
protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation.
Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load
encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of the measuring zones without interfering with
R the load.

Reverse The output signals from the phase selection function produce
operation important information about faulty phase(s), which can be used
for fault analysis as well.

Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic separate Ph-Ph


en05000034.vsd and Ph-E settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS
IEC05000034 V1 EN The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme
Figure 10. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase protection with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and
selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each of the
function FRPSPDIS activated independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive
and reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection
for transformer connected to overhead lines and cables of
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault
different types and lengths.
loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase
selection makes the function suitable in applications with single Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
phase auto-reclosing.
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of (ZMRPDIS) together with Phase selection, quadrilateral
each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) has functionality
mode. This makes them suitable, together with different for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to
communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in
cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel figure 7.
lines, multi-terminal lines.

Directional impedance element for Mho characteristic X


ZDMRDIR
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be optionally
Forward
supervised by a phase unselective directional function (phase operation
unselective, because it is based on symmetrical components).

Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC


The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes
features for fault inception detection and high SIR detection. It
also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as well R
as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.
Reverse
ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different parts: operation
1. A fault inception detection logic
2. High SIR detection logic
en05000034.vsd
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS IEC05000034 V1 EN

The ability to accurately and reliably classify different types of Figure 11. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase
fault so that single phase tripping and autoreclosing can be selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
function FRPSPDIS activated
used plays an important roll in today's power systems.

28 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault zone) through the phase selector or the first starting zone. This
loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in phase can provide fast operate times for evolving faults.
selection makes the function suitable in applications with single
pole tripping and autoreclosing. The operation of the phase-selection is primarily based on a
current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities), however there is
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which
overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-to-earth bases its operation on voltage and current phasors exclusively.
faults on heavily loaded power lines. Additionally the directional element provides a fast and correct
directional decision under difficult operating conditions,
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and
each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional faults with only zero-sequence in-feed. During phase-to-earth
mode. This makes them suitable, together with different faults on heavily loaded power lines there is an adaptive load
communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and compensation algorithm that prevents overreaching of the
cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel distance zones in the load exporting end, improving the
lines, multi-terminal lines and so on. selectivity of the function. This also reduces underreach in the
importing end.
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS High speed distance protection for series comp. lines, quad
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases and mho characteristic ZMFCPDIS
close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations, The high speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS) provides a
the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is sub-cycle, down towards a half-cycle operate time. Its six zone,
reduced for example, difficulties to get permission to build new full scheme protection concept is entirely suitable in
power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the applications with single-phase autoreclosing.
different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and
autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is fundamentally
matter. The phase selection function is designed to accurately the same function as ZMFPDIS but provides more flexibility in
select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent zone settings to suit more complex applications, such as series
on the fault type. compensated lines. In operation for series compensated
networks, the parameters of the directional function are altered
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission to handle voltage reversal.
networks may make fault resistance coverage difficult to
achieve. Therefore, the function has a built in algorithm for load Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibility to
encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode. This
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring can even be decided separate for the phase-to-ground or
zones without interfering with the load. phase-to-phase loops. The six zones can operate either
independent of each other, or their start can be linked (per
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives zone) through the phase selector or the first starting zone. This
also important information about faulty phase(s) which can be can provide fast operate times for evolving faults.
used for fault analysis.
The operation of the phase-selection is primarily based on a
A current-based phase selection is also included. The current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities), however there is
measuring elements continuously measure three phase also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which
currents and the residual current and, compare them with the bases its operation on voltage and current phasors exclusively.
set values. Additionally the directional element provides a fast and correct
directional decision under difficult operating conditions,
High speed distance protection, quadrilateral and mho
including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and
ZMFPDIS
faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.
The high speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) provides a sub-
cycle, down towards a half-cycle operate time. Its six zone, full During phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines
scheme protection concept is entirely suitable in applications there is an adaptive load compensation algorithm that prevents
with single-phase autoreclosing. overreaching of the distance zones in the load exporting end,
improving the selectivity of the function. This also reduces
Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibility to underreach in the importing end.
operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode. This
can even be decided separate for the phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase loops. The six zones can operate either
independent of each other, or their start can be linked (per

ABB 29
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in OOSPPAM


Power swing detection ZMRPSB function to allow the direct connection of two groups of three-
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or phase currents; that may be needed for very powerful
trip of big generation plants. generators, with stator windings split into two groups per
phase, when each group is equipped with current transformers.
Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB ) is used to detect
The protection function performs a simple summation of the
power swings and initiate block of all distance protection zones.
currents of the two channels I3P1 and I3P2.
Occurrence of earth-fault currents during a power swing
inhibits the ZMRPSB function, to allow fault clearance. Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ
The optional phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is used with the
Power swing logic PSLPSCH
ZMQPDIS and FDPSPDIS distance protection. The main
Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementary function to
purpose of this function is to provide a selective tripping for
Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB) function. It provides
cross-country faults in isolated or high impedance-earthed
possibility for selective tripping of faults on power lines during
networks.
system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the
distance protection function should normally be blocked. The Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ
complete logic consists of two different parts: The Phase preference logic function (PPL2PHIZ) is used with
the high speed distance protection, quad and mho
• Communication and tripping part: provides selective
characteristic (ZMFPDIS). It is intended to be used in isolated or
tripping on the basis of special distance protection zones
high impedance earthed networks where there is a requirement
and a scheme communication logic, which are not
to operate on only one of the faulty lines during a cross-country
blocked during the system oscillations.
fault. It can be used without preference to restrain operation for
• Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of
single earth faults with a delayed zero-sequence current
instantaneous distance protection zone 1 for oscillations,
release.
which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the
adjacent power lines and other primary elements. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or
lagging phase-earth loop for measurement. It initiates operation
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM on the preferred fault based on the selected phase preference.
Sudden events in an electric power system such as large A number of different phase preference combinations are
changes in load, fault occurrence or fault clearance, can cause available for selection.
power oscillations referred to as power swings. In a non-
PPL2PHIZ provides an additional phase selection criteria,
recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that
namely under voltage criteria, suitable for cross-country faults.
the synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping.
In radial networks, where there is no fault current in the phase
The main purpose of the pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) is to
with the external fault, current or impedance based phase
detect, evaluate, and take the required action for pole slipping
selection methods become ineffective. Hence, only voltage can
occurrences in the power system.
be used for phase selection. The phase selection result will be
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM the same for all bays on a bus since the voltage is the same,
The out-of-step protection (OOSPPAM ) function in the IED can which is an important condition for operating with phase
be used for both generator protection and as well for line preference.
protection applications.
In meshed and stronger networks, it is difficult to find
The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect, appropriate under-voltage or phase selection settings. If
evaluate, and take the required action during pole slipping PPL2PHIZ is unable to detect both faulty phases, then it is not
occurrences in the power system. possible to provide preference. The distance protection will still
be released however, without preference. The final result might
The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and trips be that both faulty feeders are operated. In other words,
the generator as fast as possible, after the first pole-slip if the operation is prioritized over strict adherence to preference.
center of oscillation is found to be in zone 1, which normally
includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based
center of oscillation is found to be further out in the power ZCVPSOF
system, in zone 2, more than one pole-slip is usually allowed Automatic switch onto fault logic (ZCVPSOF) is a function that
before the generator-transformer unit is disconnected. A gives an instantaneous trip at closing of breaker onto a fault. A
parameter setting is available to take into account the circuit dead line detection check is provided to activate the function
breaker opening time. If there are several out-of-step relays in when the line is dead.
the power system, then the one which finds the center of
oscillation in its zone 1 should operate first.

30 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

5. Wide area measurement system 6. Current protection

Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC


The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low
Configuration parameters for IEEE1344 and C37.118 protocol transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a
PMUCONF high set short-circuit protection function.
The IED supports the following IEEE synchrophasor standards:
• IEEE 1344-1995 (Both measurements and data Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC
communication) Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps
• IEEE Std C37.118-2005 (Both measurements and data (OC4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delay for each step.
communication)
• IEEE Std C37.118.1–2011 and C37.118.1a-2014 All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available
(Measurements) together with an optional user defined time characteristic.
• IEEE Std C37.118.2-2011 (Data communication)
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized
with memory. The function can be set to be directional or non-
PMUCONF contains the PMU configuration parameters for directional independently for each of the steps.
both IEEE C37.118 and IEEE 1344 protocols. This means all the
required settings and parameters in order to establish and A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function
define a number of TCP and/or UDP connections with one or and can be used to block each step individually.
more PDC clients (synchrophasor client). This includes port
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC
numbers, TCP/UDP IP addresses, and specific settings for
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC)
IEEE C37.118 as well as IEEE 1344 protocols.
has a low transient overreach and short tripping times to allow
Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 PMUREPORT the use for instantaneous earth-fault protection, with the reach
The phasor measurement reporting block moves the phasor limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at
calculations into an IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 minimum source impedance. EFPIOC is configured to measure
synchrophasor frame format. The PMUREPORT block contains the residual current from the three-phase current inputs and
parameters for PMU performance class and reporting rate, the can be configured to measure the current from a separate
IDCODE and Global PMU ID, format of the data streamed current input.
through the protocol, the type of reported synchrophasors, as
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps
well as settings for reporting analog and digital signals.
EF4PTOC
The message generated by the PMUREPORT function block is Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps
set in accordance with the IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 (EF4PTOC) can be used as main protection for phase-to-earth
standards. faults. It can also be used to provide a system back-up, for
example, in the case of the primary protection being out of
There are settings for Phasor type (positive sequence, negative service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit
sequence or zero sequence in case of 3-phase phasor and L1, failure.
L2 or L3 in case of single phase phasor), PMU's Service class
(Protection or Measurement), Phasor representation (polar or EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent for
rectangular) and the data types for phasor data, analog data each step.
and frequency data.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available
Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients over TCP together with an optional user-defined characteristic.
and/or 6 UDP group clients for multicast or unicast
EF4PTOC can be set to be directional or non-directional
transmission of phasor data from the IED. More information
independently for each step.
regarding synchrophasor communication structure and
TCP/UDP configuration is available in Application Manual under IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either
section C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming zero sequence or negative sequence.
Protocol Configuration.
A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each
Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in the IED, which step.
can stream out same or different data at different reporting
rates or different performance (service) classes. Directional operation can be combined together with the
corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking
teleprotection scheme. The current reversal and weak-end
infeed functionality are available as well.

ABB 31
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

The residual current can be calculated by summing the three- The three-phase current measuring protection has an I 2 t
phase currents or taking the input from the neutral CT. characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal
memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius or
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used is Thermal
protection NS4PTOC
overload protection (LCPTTR) (Celsius) or (LFPTTR)
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
(Fahrenheit).
protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delay
independent for each step separately. An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take
action well before the line is tripped.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available
together with an optional user defined characteristic. Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to
reclose after operation are presented.
The directional function is voltage polarized.
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup
independently for each of the steps.
tripping of the surrounding breakers in case the own breaker
fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based, contact-based or
NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical
an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
fault; phase-phase short circuits, phase-phase-earth short
circuits and single phase earth faults.
A current check with extremely short reset time is used as
check criterion to achieve high security against unwanted
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup for
operation.
example, in the case of the primary protection being out of
service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current
failure.
through the breaker is small.
Directional operation can be combined together with
CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use
corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking
with single phase tripping applications. For the three-phase
teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for directional zero
version of CCRBRF the current criteria can be set to operate
sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weak-end
only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase
infeed functionality are available.
plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power back-up trip command.
protection SDEPSDE
CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or
In isolated networks or in networks with high impedance
three-phase re-trip of its own breaker to avoid unnecessary
earthing, the earth fault current is significantly smaller than the
tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to
short circuit currents. In addition to this, the magnitude of the
mistakes during testing.
fault current is almost independent on the fault location in the
network. The protection can be selected to use either the Stub protection STBPTOC
residual current or residual power component 3U0·3I0·cos j, When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and
for operating quantity with maintained short circuit capacity. the line disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements
There is also available one nondirectional 3I0 step and one 3U0 the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the
overvoltage tripping step. disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will
thus not be able to operate and must be blocked.
No specific sensitive current input is needed. Sensitive
directional residual overcurrent and power protection The stub protection (STBPTOC) covers the zone between the
(SDEPSDE) can be set as low 0.25% of IBase. current transformers and the open disconnector. The three-
phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a
Thermal overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/
normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line
LFPTTR
disconnector.
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the
thermal limits has generated a need of a thermal overload Pole discordance protection CCPDSC
protection for power lines. An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents
which cause thermal stress on rotating machines and can
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other
cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative
protection functions and the introduction of the thermal
sequence current functions.
overload protection can allow the protected circuit to operate
closer to the thermal limits.

32 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation.


If the situation persists the surrounding breakers should be Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation. Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal
conditions such as sudden power loss, tap changer regulating
The Pole discordance protection function (CCPDSC) operates failures, and open line ends on long lines.
based on information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit
breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function can be
unsymmetrical phase currents when required. used to detect open line ends, normally then combined with a
directional reactive over-power function to supervise the
Directional over/underpower protection GOPPDOP/ system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an
GUPPDUP alarm, switch in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
The directional over-/under-power protection (GOPPDOP/
GUPPDUP) can be used wherever a high/low active, reactive or OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or
apparent power protection or alarming is required. The definite time delayed.
functions can alternatively be used to check the direction of
OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to
active or reactive power flow in the power system. There are a
system service voltage.
number of applications where such functionality is needed.
Some of them are: Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth
• detection of reversed active power flow
faults.
• detection of high reactive power flow
Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) function
Each function has two steps with definite time delay.
calculates the residual voltage from the three-phase voltage
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC input transformers or measures it from a single voltage input
The main purpose of the function Broken conductor check transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage
(BRCPTOC) is the detection of broken conductors on protected transformer.
power lines and cables (series faults). Detection can be used to
ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite
give alarm only or trip the line breaker.
time delay.
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC
A reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC)
function can be used as generator backup protection against Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH
short-circuits. When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is
subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits,
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level
stray flux will flow into non-laminated components that are not
that can be used either with definite time or inverse time
designed to carry flux. This will cause eddy currents to flow.
characteristic. Additionally, it can be voltage controlled/
These eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe
restrained.
damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also time. The function has settable inverse operating curves and
available within the function in order to provide functionality for independent alarm stages.
overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It
7. Voltage protection compares the voltages from two three phase sets of voltage
transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip
Two-step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV step.
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or
abnormal conditions. The two-step undervoltage protection Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV
function (UV2PTUV) can be used to open circuit breakers to Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV ) is suitable for use in
prepare for system restoration at power outages or as a long- networks with an automatic system restoration function.
time delayed back-up to the primary protection. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the circuit
breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time longer than the set time and the circuit breaker remains
time delay. closed.

It has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to the system The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure
service voltage. supervision FUFSPVC.

ABB 33
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC Overfrequency protection SAPTOF


The radial feeder protection (PAPGAPC) function is used to Overfrequency protection function (SAPTOF) is applicable in all
provide protection of radial feeders having passive loads or situations, where reliable detection of high fundamental power
weak end in-feed sources. It is possible to achieve fast tripping system frequency is needed.
using communication system with remote end or delayed
tripping not requiring communication or upon communication Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt
system failure. For fast tripping, scheme communication is faults in the power network. Close to the generating plant,
required. Delayed tripping does not require scheme generator governor problems can also cause over frequency.
communication.
SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used
The PAPGAPC function performs phase selection using mainly for generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It
measured voltages. Each phase voltage is compared to the is also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring. A
opposite phase-phase voltage. A phase is deemed to have a definite time delay is provided for operate.
fault if its phase voltage drops below a settable percentage of
SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
the opposite phase-phase voltage. The phase - phase voltages
include memory. This memory function has a settable time The operation is based on positive sequence voltage
constant. measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-
neutral voltages to be connected.
The voltage-based phase selection is used for both fast and
delayed tripping. To achieve fast tripping, scheme Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC
communication is required. Delayed tripping does not require The rate-of-change of frequency protection function (SAPFRC )
scheme communication. It is possible to permit delayed gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system.
tripping only upon failure of the communications channel by SAPFRC measures frequency with high accuracy, and can be
blocking the delayed tripping logic with a communications used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial
channel healthy input signal. action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between a positive
or negative change of frequency. A definite time delay is
On receipt of the communications signal, phase selective
provided for operate.
outputs for fast tripping are set based on the phase(s) in which
the phase selection function has operated. SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The
operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement
For delayed tripping, single pole and three pole delays are
and requires two phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages
separately and independently settable. Furthermore, it is
to be connected.
possible to enable or disable single pole and three pole delayed
tripping. For single phase faults, it is possible to include a
residual current check in the tripping logic. Three pole tripping 9. Multipurpose protection
is always selected for phase selection on more than one phase.
Three pole tripping will also occur if the residual current General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
exceeds the set level during fuse failure for a time longer than The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be
the three pole trip delay time. utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting
unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or
unsymmetrical faults.
8. Frequency protection
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF resistive earth faults, outside the distance protection reach, for
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the the transmission line. Three functions are used, which
network. measures the neutral current and each of the three phase
voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and
Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) measures frequency with
this phase selection will be used in conjunction with the
high accuracy, and is used for load shedding systems, remedial
detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault
action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on. Separate
protection function.
definite time delays are provided for operate and restore.

SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking. 10. General calculation

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC


measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase- The multi-purpose filter function block (SMAIHPAC) is arranged
neutral voltages to be connected. as a three-phase filter. It has very much the same user interface
(e.g. inputs and outputs) as the standard pre-processing

34 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

function block SMAI. However the main difference is that it can • Distance protection function.
be used to extract any frequency component from the input • Undervoltage function.
signal. Thus it can, for example, be used to build sub- • Energisation function and voltage check for the weak
synchronous resonance protection for synchronous generator. infeed logic.

These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in


11. Secondary system supervision the secondary circuits between voltage instrument
transformers and the IED. These unintentional operations can
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
be prevented by fuse failure supervision (VDSPVC).
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause
unwanted operation of many protection functions such as VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage
differential, earth-fault current and negative-sequence current measurement circuit, based on phase wise comparison of
functions. voltages of main and pilot fused circuits. VDSPVC blocking
output can be configured to block functions that need to be
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual
blocked in case of faults in the voltage circuit.
current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with
the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another
set of cores on the current transformer. 12. Control

A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN
used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous
inadvertent tripping. networks at the correct moment including the breaker closing
time, which improves the network stability.
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FUFSPVC) is to Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
block voltage measuring functions at failures in the secondary (SESRSYN) function checks that the voltages on both sides of
circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side
avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might occur. dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme
detection methods, negative sequence and zero sequence for double bus and 1½ breaker or ring busbar arrangements.
based detection and an additional delta voltage and delta
current detection. Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked
by the function and can have different settings.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended
for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. For systems, which can run asynchronously, a synchronizing
It is based on the negative-sequence quantities. feature is also provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing
feature is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in two asynchronous systems are in phase and can be connected.
directly or low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the The synchronizing feature evaluates voltage difference, phase
zero sequence measuring quantities. angle difference, slip frequency and frequency rate of change
before issuing a controlled closing of the circuit breaker.
The selection of different operation modes is possible by a Breaker closing time is a setting.
setting parameter in order to take into account the particular
earthing of the network. Autorecloser SMBRREC
The auto reclosing function provides:
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage • high-speed and/or delayed auto reclosing
measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision • single and/or three phase auto reclosing
function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in • support for single or multi-breaker applications.
practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching
during station operations.
The auto recloser can be used for delayed busbar restoration.
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC
Different protection functions within the protection IED Up to five reclosing shots can be performed. The first shot can
operates on the basis of measured voltage at the relay point. be single-, two-, and /or three-phase depending on the type of
Some example of protection functions are: the fault and the selected auto reclosing mode.

Several auto reclosing functions can be provided for multi-


breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one circuit

ABB 35
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

breaker to reclose first and the second will only close if the fault function handles interlocking of one bay. The interlocking
proved to be transient. function is distributed to each IED and is not dependent on any
central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs
Each auto reclosing function can be configured to co-operate communicate via the system-wide interbay bus (IEC
with the synchrocheck function. 61850-8-1) or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The
interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and
Apparatus control APC
apparatus position status at any given time.
The apparatus control functions are used for control and
supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing For easy and safe implementation of the interlocking function,
switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after the IED is delivered with standardized and tested software
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking
interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and conditions. The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet
external or internal blockings. the customer’s specific requirements, by adding configurable
logic by means of the graphical configuration tool.
The complete apparatus control function is
not included in this product, and the Switch controller SCSWI
information below is included for The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all
understanding of the principle for the use of functions to properly select and operate switching primary
QCBAY, LOCREM, and LOCREMCTRL. apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on
one multi-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.
Apparatus control features: Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual
• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation status of positions and to perform the control operations, that
• Selection and supervision of operator place is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of
• Command supervision circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the
• Block/deblock of operation switching operation and position.
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position and quality indications Circuit switch SXSWI
• Overriding of interlocking functions The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the
• Overriding of synchrocheck actual status of positions and to perform the control operations,
• Operation counter that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the
• Suppression of mid position form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary output
boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
Two types of command models can be used: Reservation function QCRSV
• Direct with normal security The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer
• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to
prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and substation.
the resulting position is not supervised. Enhanced security
Reservation input RESIN
means that the command is evaluated with an additional
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation
supervision of the status value of the control object. The
information from other bays. The number of instances is the
command sequence with enhanced security is always
same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are
terminated by a CommandTermination service primitive and an
available).
AddCause telling if the command was successful or if
something went wrong. Bay control QCBAY
The Bay control (QCBAY) function is used together with Local
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with
remote and local remote control functions to handle the
authority control if so defined.
selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also provides
Interlocking blocking functions that can be distributed to different
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate apparatuses within the bay.
primary switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is
Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY
under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or
The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE
accidental human injury.
(XLNPROXY) gives an internal representation of the position
Each apparatus control function has interlocking modules status and control response for a switch modelled in a breaker
included for different switchyard arrangements, where each
36 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

IED. This representation is identical to that of an SXCBR or commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such
SXSWI function. as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands
can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.
GOOSE function block to receive a switching device
GOOSEXLNRCV Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS
The GOOSE XLN Receive component is used to collect Automation bits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within
information from another device’s XCBR/XSWI logical node PCM600 to get into the configuration of the commands coming
sent over process bus via GOOSE. The GOOSE XLN Receive through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS function plays the
component includes 12 different outputs (and their respective same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and
channel valid bits) with defined names to ease the 61850 MULTICMDRCV (for LON).
mapping of the GOOSE signals in the configuration process.
Single command, 16 signals
Local remote LOCREM/Local remote control LOCREMCTRL The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote automation system or from the local HMI. The command
switch are connected via the function blocks LOCREM and function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to
LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY function block. The control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined
parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to functionality.
choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or
from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.
13. Scheme communication
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking
presentation SLGAPC
scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults,
presentation (SLGAPC) (or the selector switch function block) is
scheme communication logic is provided. All types of
used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality
communication schemes for permissive underreaching,
compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch.
permissive overreaching, blocking, delta based blocking,
Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in
unblocking and intertrip are available.
order to have different functions operating on pre-set values.
Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for
issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase scheme communication signaling when included.
portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all these
problems. Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection ZC1PPSCH
Selector mini switch VSGAPC Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault
The Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function block is a clearance for all faults on a power line. All possible types of
multipurpose function used for a variety of applications, as a communication schemes for example, permissive underreach,
general purpose switch. permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To
manage problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on
lines phase segregated communication is needed. This will then
the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI or from Binary
replace the standard Scheme communication logic for distance
inputs
or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) on important lines where
Generic communication function for Double Point indication three communication channels (in each subsystem) are
DPGAPC available for the distance protection communication.
Generic communication function for Double Point indication
The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme
(DPGAPC) function block is used to send double point position
communication logic for distance protection (ZC1PPSCH)
indications to other systems, equipment or functions in the
function is to supplement the distance protection function such
substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication
that:
protocols. It is especially intended to be used in the interlocking
station-wide logics. • fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for
which the faults are on the part of the line not covered by
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC
its underreaching zone.
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function
• correct phase selection can be maintained to support
block is a collection of 8 single point commands that can be
single-pole tripping for faults occurring anywhere on the
used for direct commands for example reset of LEDs or putting
entire length of a double circuit line.
IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple
commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without
confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the

ABB 37
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

To accomplish this, three separate communication channels,


that is, one per phase, each capable of transmitting a signal in Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent
each direction is required. protection ECPSCH
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the
ZC1PPSCH can be completed with the current reversal and line not covered by the instantaneous step of the residual
WEI logic for phase segregated communication, when found overcurrent protection, the directional residual overcurrent
necessary in Blocking and Permissive overreaching schemes. protection can be supported with a logic that uses
communication channels.
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance
protection ZCRWPSCH In the directional scheme, information of the fault current
The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal and direction must be transmitted to the other line end. With
weak end infeed logic functions that supplement the standard directional comparison, a short operate time of the protection
scheme communication logic. It is not suitable for standalone including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This
use as it requires inputs from the distance protection functions short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after
and the scheme communications function included within the the fault clearance.
terminal.
The communication logic module for directional residual current
On detection of a current reversal, the current reversal logic protection enables blocking as well as permissive under/
provides an output to block the sending of the teleprotection overreaching, and unblocking schemes. The logic can also be
signal to the remote end, and to block the permissive tripping at supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed and current
the local end. This blocking condition is maintained long reversal, included in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic
enough to ensure that no unwanted operation will occur as a for residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) function.
result of the current reversal.
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak end overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH
infeed logic provides an output for sending the received The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
teleprotection signal back to the remote sending end and other overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) is a supplement to
output(s) for local tripping. For terminals equipped for single- Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent
and two-pole tripping, outputs for the faulted phase(s) are protection ECPSCH.
provided. Undervoltage detectors are used to detect the faulted
phase(s). To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the
directional earth fault protection function can be supported with
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase logic that uses tele-protection channels.
segregated communication ZC1WPSCH
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase This is why the IEDs have available additions to the scheme
segregated communication (ZC1WPSCH) function is used to communication logic.
prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both
using permissive overreach protection schemes in application
terminals, overreaching permissive communication schemes
with parallel lines where the overreach from the two ends
can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This
overlaps on the parallel line.
unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent on the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of
power behind the protection can be too low to activate the interconnection between the two buses. To avoid this type of
distance protection function. When activated, received carrier disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transient blocking
signal together with local undervoltage criteria and no reverse logic) can be used.
zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal
Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent
is also echoed back to accelerate the sending end.
protection can basically operate only when the protection in the
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH remote IED can detect the fault. The detection requires a
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this IED. The
communication channel is available, local acceleration logic fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-
(ZCLCPSCH) can be used. This logic enables fast fault clearing positive and/or zero-sequence source impedance behind this
and re-closing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not IED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI)
fully replace a communication channel. echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is limited to 200
ms to avoid channel lockup.
The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone
extension) or by the loss-of-load current (loss-of-load
acceleration).

38 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV


Direct transfer trip DTT Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault
Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC condition. Negative sequence voltage and current get high
values during unsymmetrical faults.
Low active power and power factor protection (LAPPGAPC)
function measures power flow. It can be used for protection and Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV
monitoring of: Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal
conditions involving earth. They can reach considerably high
• phase wise low active power
values during earth faults.
• phase wise low power factor
• phase wise reactive power and apparent power as service Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC
values Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault
condition. They can reach considerably high values during
Following features are available:
abnormal operation.
• Definite time stage for low active power protection
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC
• Definite time stage for low power factor protection
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal
• Individual enabling of Low active power and Low power
conditions involving earth. They have a considerably high value
factor functions
during earth faults.
• Low active power trip with 2 selection modes '1 out of 3'
and '2 out of 3' Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC
• Phase wise calculated values of apparent power, reactive Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is designed for
power, active power and power factor are available as overcurrent conditions.
service values
• Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current Features:

Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC • Phase wise start and trip signals
Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC) • Overcurrent protection
function calculates the remote end voltage of the transmission • Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
line utilizing local measured voltage, current and with the help of • Single definite time stage trip function.
transmission line parameters, that is, line resistance, reactance,
capacitance and local shunt reactor. For protection of long Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC
transmission line for in zone faults, COUVGAPCcan be Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC) is designed for
incorporated with local criteria within direct transfer trip logic to detecting loss of load conditions.
ensure tripping of the line only under abnormal conditions.
Features:
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC
• Phase wise start and trip signals
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) function is a
• Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
fast way of finding any abnormality in line currents. When there
• Single definite time stage trip function
is a fault in the system, the current changes faster than the
voltage. SCCVPTOC finds abnormal condition based on phase-
to-phase current variation. The main application is as a local
criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used. 14. Logic

Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC Tripping logic SMPPTRC


In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CR signal A function block for protection tripping is always provided as
gives the trip to the circuit breaker after checking certain local basic for each circuit breaker involved in the tripping of the fault.
criteria functions in order to increase the security of the overall It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse
tripping functionality. Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC) of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for
function gives final trip output of the DTT scheme. correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions.

Features: The trip function block also includes a settable latch


functionality and circuit breaker closing circuit lockout.
• Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme
• Blocking function output on CR Channel Error The trip function can provide directional data from different
• Phase wise trip outputs application functions. All start and directional outputs are
mapped to the logical node data model.

ABB 39
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

• INVERTER function block that inverts the input signal to the


General start matrix block SMAGAPC output.
The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and directional
output signals from different application functions and creates a • LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output
common start and directional output signal ( STDIR ) to be signal one execution cycle.
connected to the Trip function.
• OR function block. The OR function is used to form general
The idea is to provide general start and directional information combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR
for the 61850 trip logic data model SMPPTRC. function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of
the outputs is inverted.
IEC 61850 naming and description:
• SMAGAPC for Start Matrix function • PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for
• SMPPTRC for Trip function pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs, settable
• STARTCOMB for Start Combination function pulse time.

• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set


Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC an output from two inputs respectively. Each block has two
The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls
signals and other logical output signals to different output if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to
contacts on the IED. the state it had before the power interruption. RESET input
has priority.
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these
outputs can be connected to physical tripping outputs • SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset
according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or an output from two inputs respectively. Each block has two
steady output. outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls
if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to
Group alarm logic function ALMCALH
the state it had before the power interruption. The SET input
The group alarm logic function (ALMCALH) is used to route
has priority.
several alarm signals to a common indication, LED and/or
contact, in the IED. • TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed
outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable
Group warning logic function WRNCALH
time delay.
The group warning logic function (WRNCALH) is used to route
several warning signals to a common indication, LED and/or • XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with
contact, in the IED. boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One
of the outputs is inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the
Group indication logic function INDCALH
input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
The group indication logic function (INDCALH) is used to route
several indication signals to a common indication, LED and/or
contact, in the IED. Configurable logic blocks Q/T
The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time stamp and
Basic configurable logic blocks the quality of the input signals (have suffix QT at the end of their
The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time function name).
stamp and quality of signals (have no suffix QT at the end of
their function name). A number of logic blocks and timers are The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs'
always available as basic for the user to adapt the configuration configuration to the specific application needs. The list below
to the specific application needs. The list below shows a shows a summary of the function blocks and their features.
summary of the function blocks and their features.
• ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates
These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension the time stamp and the quality of input signals. Each block
logic package with the same number of instances. has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

• AND function block. The AND function is used to form general • INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group
combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The AND signal. Single position input is copied to value part of
function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part of
the outputs is inverted. SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the
corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.
• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal
should be able to pass from the input to the output. • INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group
signal input. The value part of single position input is
40 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single position level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer,
input is copied to TIME output. The quality bits in the floating point, string types of signals are available.
common part and the indication part of inputs signal are
copied to the corresponding quality output. One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.

• INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
according to a "valid" input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If supervision TEIGAPC
input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is set, all outputs The Elapsed time integrator function (TEIGAPC) is a function
invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The time stamp of an that accumulates the elapsed time when a given binary signal
output will be set to the latest time stamp of INPUT and has been high.
VALID inputs.
The main features of TEIGAPC
• INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal
• Applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds).
and propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input
• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and overflow.
signal.
• Possibility to define a warning or alarm with the resolution
• ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time of 10 milliseconds.
stamp and the quality of the input signals. Each block has • Retaining of the integration value.
six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted. • Possibilities for blocking and reset.
• Reporting of the integrated time.
• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used,
for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of
Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit B16I
outputs. The function also propagates the time stamp and
Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit (B16I) is used to transform
the quality of the input signal.
a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer.
• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each block
representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC
has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation,
setting controls if the block after a power interruption
16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to transform a set of 16 boolean
should return to the state before the interruption, or be
(logical) signals into an integer. The block input will freeze the
reset. The function also propagates the time stamp and
output at the last value.
the quality of the input signal.
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16
• SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each block
transform an integer into a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals.
has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the block after a power interruption Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node
should return to the state before the interruption, or be representation ITBGAPC
reset. The function also propagates the time stamp and Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation
the quality of the input signal. function (ITBGAPC) is used to transform an integer which is
transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function to 16
• TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed
boolean (logic) output signals.
outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable
time delay. The function also propagates the time stamp Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP
and the quality of the input signal. The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer
values in the system relative to each other or to a fixed value. It
• XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates
is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for monitoring,
the time stamp and the quality of the input signals. Each
supervision, interlocking and other logics.
block has two outputs where one is inverted.
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP
Extension logic package The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real
The logic extension block package includes additional trip value signals in the system relative to each other or to a fixed
matrix logic and configurable logic blocks. value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for
monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set (fixed)
signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for
forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain

ABB 41
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

15. Monitoring pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the
recording.
Measurements CVMMXN, CMMXU, VNMMXU, VMMXU,
CMSQI, VMSQI Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the
The measurement functions are used to get on-line information standard Comtrade format as a reader file HDR, a configuration
from the IED. These service values make it possible to display file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same applies to all events,
on-line information on the local HMI and on the substation which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is
automation system about: used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance
report files can be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis
• measured voltages, currents, frequency, active, reactive using the disturbance handling tool.
and apparent power and power factor
• measured analog values from merging units Event list DRPRDRE
• primary phasors Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system
• positive, negative and zero sequence currents and from an overview perspective and is a complement to specific
voltages disturbance recorder functions.
• mA, input currents
• pulse counters The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance recorder function. The list may contain up to 1000
time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
Supervision of mA input signals
The main purpose of the function is to measure and process Indications DRPRDRE
signals from different measuring transducers. Many devices To get fast, condensed and reliable information about
used in process control represent various parameters such as disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system it is
frequency, temperature and DC battery voltage as low current important to know, for example binary signals that have
values, usually in the range 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA. changed status during a disturbance. This information is used
in the short perspective to get information via the local HMI in a
Alarm limits can be set and used as triggers, e.g. to generate straightforward way.
trip or alarm signals.
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red),
The function requires that the IED is equipped with the mA input which will display status information about the IED and the
module. Disturbance recorder function (triggered).
Disturbance report DRPRDRE
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the signals connected to the Disturbance recorder function that
primary and/or in the secondary system together with have changed status during a disturbance.
continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance
report functionality. Event recorder DRPRDRE
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in
Disturbance report (DRPRDRE), always included in the IED, the primary and/or in the secondary system is vital, for example,
acquires sampled data of all selected analog input and binary time-tagged events logged during disturbances. This
signals connected to the function block with a maximum of 40 information is used for different purposes in the short term (for
analog and 352 binary signals. example corrective actions) and in the long term (for example
functional analysis).
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for
several functions: The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals
connected to the Disturbance recorder function. Each
• Event list
recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
• Indications
• Event recorder The event recorder information is available for the disturbances
• Trip value recorder locally in the IED.
• Disturbance recorder
• Fault locator The event recording information is an integrated part of the
disturbance record (Comtrade file).
The Disturbance report function is characterized by great
flexibility regarding configuration, starting conditions, recording Trip value recorder DRPRDRE
times, and large storage capacity. Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and
voltages are vital for the disturbance evaluation.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the
AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks, which are set to trigger The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected
the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from start of analog input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder
42 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and


during the fault for each analog input signal. Measured value expander block RANGE_XP
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN,
The trip value recorder information is available for the CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU), current and voltage
disturbances locally in the IED. sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC
61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the provided with measurement supervision functionality. All
disturbance record (Comtrade file). measured values can be supervised with four settable limits:
low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The
Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE
measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and
introduced to enable translating the integer output signal from
reliable information about disturbances in the power system. It
the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low limit,
facilitates understanding system behavior and related primary
below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high
and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.
limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the
Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short
configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
perspective (for example corrective actions) and long
perspective (for example functional analysis). Insulation supervision for gas medium function SSIMG
Insulation supervision for gas medium (SSIMG) is used for
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected
monitoring the circuit breaker condition. Binary information
analog and binary signals connected to the Disturbance
based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input
recorder function (maximum 40 analog and 352 binary signals).
signals to the function. In addition, the function generates
The binary signals available are the same as for the event
alarms based on received information.
recorder function.
Insulation supervision for liquid medium SSIML
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not
Insulation supervision for liquid medium (SSIML) is used for
dependent on the operation of protection functions. It can
monitoring the transformer condition. Binary information based
record disturbances not detected by protection functions. Up
on the oil level in the transformer is used as input signals to the
to ten seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in
function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on
the disturbance file.
received information.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR
disturbances are saved in the IED and the local HMI is used to
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) is
view the list of recordings.
used to monitor different parameters of the breaker condition.
Event function The breaker requires maintenance when the number of
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA operations reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning
communication, time-tagged events can be sent at change or of the circuit breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit
cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear,
created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to travel time, number of operation cycles and estimate the
the Event function (EVENT). The EVENT function block is used accumulated energy during arcing periods.
for LON and SPA communication.
Fault locator LMBRFLO
Analog, integer and double indication values are also
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to
transferred through the EVENT function.
minimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or to pin-point
Generic communication function for Single Point indication a weak spot on the line.
SPGAPC
The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
distance to the fault in km, miles or % of line length. The main
(SPGAPC) is used to send one single logical signal to other
advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for
systems or equipment in the substation.
load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on double
Generic communication function for measured values circuit lines.
MVGAPC
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local
Generic communication function for measured values
sources and calculation of the distribution of fault currents from
(MVGAPC) function is used to send the instantaneous value of
each side. This distribution of fault current, together with
an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a
the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new source
RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement
data at the actual fault to further increase the accuracy.
supervision on that value.

ABB 43
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source calculation of energy pulses, alarm signals for limit violation of
voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart, the accuracy energy values and maximum power demand, can be found.
can be still maintained with the advanced compensation
included in fault locator. The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from
the input power values by integrating them over a selected time
Event counter with limit supervison L4UFCNT tEnergy. The integration of active and reactive energy values will
The Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable counter with happen in both forward and reverse directions. These energy
four independent limits where the number of positive and/or values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs.
negative flanks on the input signal are counted against the Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs
setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated (STARTACC and STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be
when the counted value reaches that limit. reset to initial values with RSTACC input.

Overflow indication is included for each up-counter. The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are
calculated for the set time interval tEnergy and these values are
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC updated every minute through output channels. The active and
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function that reactive maximum power demand values are calculated for
accumulates the elapsed time when a given binary signal has both forward and reverse direction and these values can be
been high. reset with RSTDMD input.

The main features of TEILGAPC are:

• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9 17. Human machine interface
hours)
• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and rollover/ Local HMI
overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the
resolution of 0.1 hours
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart
• Possibilities for blocking and reset
• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
• Reporting of the accumulated time

16. Metering

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT


Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally
generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an
external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption
values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and
then read by the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is
available over the station bus. The special Binary input module
with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to
achieve this functionality.

Function for energy calculation and demand handling


ETPMMTR
Power system measurement (CVMMXN) can be used to
measure active as well as reactive power values. Function for
energy calculation and demand handling (ETPMMTR) uses IEC13000239 V3 EN
IEC13000239-3-en.vsd

measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the


Figure 12. Local human-machine interface
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and
reverse direction. Energy values can be read or generated as
pulses. Maximum demand power values are also calculated by The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:
the function. This function includes zero point clamping to
remove noise from the input signal. As output of this function:
periodic energy calculations, integration of energy values,

44 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

• Graphical display capable of showing a user defined single


line diagram and provide an interface for controlling Access points diagnostics
switchgear. The access point diagnostics function blocks (RCHLCCH,
• Navigation buttons and five user defined command buttons SCHLCCH and FRONTSTATUS) supervise communication.
to shortcuts in the HMI tree or simple commands. SCHLCCH is used for communication over the rear Ethernet
• 15 user defined three-color LEDs. ports, RCHLCCH is used for redundant communications over
• Communication port for PCM600. the rear Ethernet ports and FRONTSTATUS is used for
communication over the front port. All access point function
blocks include output signal for denial of service.
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.
Redundant communication

18. Basic IED functions IEC 62439-3 redundant communication PRP


Redundant communication according to IEC 62439-3 PRP-0,
Time synchronization
IEC 62439-3 PRP-1 parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) is
The time synchronization function is used to select a common
available as an option when ordering IEDs. PRP according to
source of absolute time for the synchronization of the IED when
IEC 62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet ports.
it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to
compare events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy HSR
station automation system and in between sub-stations. A Redundant station bus communication according to IEC
common source shall be used for IED and merging unit when 62439-3 Edition 2 High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR)
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used. is available as an option when ordering IEDs. Redundant station
bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses two optical
Precision time protocol PTP
Ethernet ports.
PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its profile
IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for power utility automation is a The HSR ring supports the connection of up to 30 relays. If
synchronization method that can be used to maintain a more than 30 relays are to be connected, it is recommended to
common time within a station. This time can be synchronized to split the network into several rings to guarantee the
the global time using, for instance, a GPS receiver. If PTP is performance for real-time applications.
enabled on the IEDs and the switches that connect the station
are compatible with IEEE 1588, the station will become Routes
synchronized to one common time with an accuracy of under A route is a specified path for data to travel between the source
1us. Using an IED as a boundary clock between several device in a subnetwork to the destination device in a different
networks will keep 1us accuracy on three levels or when using subnetwork. A route consists of a destination address and the
an HSR, 15 IEDs can be connected in a ring without losing a address of the gateway to be used when sending data to the
single microsecond in accuracy. destination device, see Figure 14.

19. Ethernet

Access points
An access point is an Ethernet communication interface for
single or redundant station communication. Each access point Default gateway

is allocated with one physical Ethernet port, two physical


Ethernet ports are allocated if redundant communication is
Gateway
activated for the access point.

Source Destination
IEC16000095-1-en.vsdx
Device 1 Device 1
IEC16000095 V1 EN

Figure 14. Route from source to destination through gateway


AP1 AP2 AP3 AP1 AP2 AP3
SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303 SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303

IEC16000092-1-en.vsdx

IEC16000092 V1 EN

Figure 13. Access points, non redundant (left) and redundant 20. Station communication
communication (right)
Communication protocols
Each IED is provided with several communication interfaces
DHCP is available for the front port, and a device connected to enabling it to connect to one or many substation level systems
it can thereby obtain an automatically assigned IP-address.

ABB 45
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or


Substation Monitoring (SM) bus. IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
A single glass or plastic port is provided for the
Available communication protocols are: IEC 60870-5-103 standard. This allows design of simple
substation automation systems including equipment from
• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol different vendors. Disturbance files uploading is provided.
• IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
• LON communication protocol Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS
• SPA communication protocol 103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol types depending on the connected signals. The set of
• DNP 3.0 communication protocol connected inputs will control which ASDUs (Application Service
Data Units) are generated.
Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
Measurands user-defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol I103MEASUSR
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. I103MEASUSR is a function block with user-defined input
The IED is equipped with up to six (order dependent) optical measurands in monitor direction. These function blocks include
Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850-8-1 station bus the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range,
communication. The IEC 61850-8-1 communication is also and the Information number parameter for each block.
possible from the electrical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1
protocol allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR
vendors to exchange information and simplifies system I103AR is a function block with defined functions for
engineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSE and autorecloser indications in monitor direction. This block
client-server communication over MMS are supported. includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information
Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE) uploading can be done number parameter is defined for each output signal.
over MMS or FTP.
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF
IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault
The quality expander component is used to display the detailed indications in monitor direction. This block includes the
quality of an IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE analog channel. The FunctionType parameter; the information number parameter is
component expands the channel quality output of a Merging defined for each output signal.
Unit analog channel received in the IED as per the IEC
61850-7-3 standard. This component can be used during the Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
ACT monitoring to get the particular channel quality of the I103FLTPROT
Merging Unit. I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction.
Each input on the function block is specific for a certain fault
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol type and therefore must be connected to a correspondent
Optical Ethernet port communication standard signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE for process bus is supported. represents the General Trip of the device and must be
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE allows Non Conventional Instrument connected to the general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or
Transformers (NCIT) with Merging Units (MUs) or stand-alone equivalent.
MUs to exchange information with the IED, and simplifies SA
engineering. IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE uses the same port as IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED
IEC 61850-8-1. I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor
direction. This block uses the parameter FunctionType ; the
LON communication protocol information number parameter is defined for each input signal.
Existing stations with ABB station bus LON can be extended
with use of the optical LON interface (glass or plastic). This Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV
allows full SA functionality including peer-to-peer messaging I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for
and cooperation between the IEDs. supervision indications in monitor direction. This block includes
the FunctionType parameter; the information number
SPA communication protocol parameter is defined for each output signal.
A single glass or plastic port is provided for the ABB SPA
protocol. This allows extensions of simple substation Status for user-defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
automation systems but the main use is for Substation I103USRDEF
Monitoring Systems SMS. I103USRDEF comprises function blocks with user-defined
input signals in monitor direction. These function blocks include
the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range,
and the information number parameter for each input signal.
46 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

communication interface for vertical communication to station


Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD HMI and gateway, and as interface for horizontal peer-to-peer
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with communication (over LON only).
pre-defined output signals. The signals are in steady state, not
pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.
21. Remote communication
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with Analog and binary signal transfer to remote end
defined IED functions. All outputs are pulsed and they are NOT Three analog and eight binary signals can be exchanged
stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter. between two IEDs. This functionality is mainly used for the line
differential protection. However it can be used in other products
Function commands user-defined for IEC 60870-5-103 as well. An IED can communicate with up to 4 remote IEDs.
I103USRCMD
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with Binary signal transfer
user-defined output signals. These function blocks include the The remote end data communication is used for the
FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, transmission of analog values for line differential protection or
and the Information number parameter for each output signal. for the transmission of only binary signals between IEDs. The
binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 any purpose, such as communication scheme related signals,
I103GENCMD transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs.
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over
IEC 60870-5-103. The function has two output signals, Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is
CMD_OFF and CMD_ON, that can be used to implement equipped with a Line Data Communication Module (LCDM). The
double-point command schemes. LDCM then acts as an interface to 64 kbit/s and 2Mbit/s
communication channels for duplex communication between
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 the IEDs. In 2Mbit/s mode, each LDCM can send and receive
pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is up to 9 analog and up to 192 binary signals simultaneously. In
pulsed with a command with value 2, while the OFF output is 64kbit/s mode, the LDCM can be configured to work in either
pulsed with a command with value 1. If in steady mode is ON analog mode or binary mode. In analog mode, the IED can send
asserted and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice versa and receive up to 3 analog signals and up to 8 binary signals. In
with command 1. binary mode, the LDCM can send and receive only binary data
(up to 192 binary signals).
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD The IED can be equipped with up to two short range, medium
I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are range or long range LDCMs.
getting the position value as an integer (for example, from the
POSITION output of the SCSWI function block) and sending it Line data communication module, short, medium and long
over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). The standard range LDCM
does not define the use of values 0 and 3. However, when The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for
connected to a switching device, these values are transmitted. communication between the IEDs situated at a distance <110
km/68 miles or from the IED to the optical-to-electrical
The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring converter with G.703 or G.703E1 interface located at a
direction (the position information), not the commands via IEC distance < 3 km/1.9 miles away. The LDCM module sends and
60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used to indicate that the receives data to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before- ANSI C37.94 standard format is used.
operate type of control).
Galvanic interface G.703 resp G.703E1
DNP3.0 communication protocol The external galvanic data communication converter G.703/G.
An electrical RS485 serial port, optical serial ports on the serial 703E1 makes an optical-to-galvanic conversion for connection
communication module (SLM), optical Ethernet ports are to a multiplexer. These units are designed for 64 kbit/s resp
available for DNP3.0 communication. DNP3.0 Level 2 2Mbit/s operation. The converter is delivered with 19” rack
communication with unsolicited events, time synchronization mounting accessories.
and disturbance reporting is provided for communication to
RTUs, Gateways or HMI systems.

Multiple command and transmit


When IEDs are used in Substation Automation systems with
LON, SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocols, the
Event and Multiple Command function blocks are used as the
ABB 47
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

22. Hardware description has two optical communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/
glass or glass/glass fibre cables. One port is used for serial
Hardware modules communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 port) and the
Numeric processing module NUM other port is used for LON communication.
The numeric processing module (NUM) is a CPU module that
handles all protection functions and logic. Line data communication module LDCM
Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to
NUM provides up to four optical Ethernet ports of type LC (one which the IED communicates.
basic and three optional).
Alternative modules for Long range (1550 nm single mode),
Power supply module PSM Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range (850 nm
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal multi mode) are available.
voltages and full isolation between the IED and the battery
system. An internal fail alarm output is available. Galvanic RS485 serial communication module
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be for DNP3.0 and IEC 60870-5-103 communication. The module
ordered. has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a balanced
serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire
Binary input module BIM
connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is
and TX and is a multidrop communication with no dedicated
available in two versions, one standard and one with enhanced
Master or slave. This variant requires however a control of the
pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used with the
output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX and
pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely
TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the
programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals
rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.
to any of the functions. They can also be included in the
disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This GPS time synchronization module GTM
enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the This module includes a GPS receiver used for time
IED and for all associated electrical circuits. synchronization. The GPS has one SMA contact for connection
to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-connector
Binary output module BOM
output.
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays
and is used for trip output or any signaling purpose. IRIG-B Time synchronizing module
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time
Static binary output module SOM
synchronizing of the IED from a station clock.
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and
six change over output relays for use in applications with high Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X
speed requirements. IRIG-B support.
Binary input/output module IOM Transformer input module TRM
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate
and output channels are needed. The ten standard output and adapt the secondary currents and voltages generated by
channels are used for trip output or any signaling purpose. The the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in
two high speed signal output channels are used for applications different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated
binary inputs cater for required binary input information. Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be
ordered.
mA input module MIM
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer High impedance resistor unit
signals in the –20 to +20 mA range from for example OLTC The high impedance resistor unit, with resistors for pick-up
position, temperature or pressure transducers. The module has value setting and a voltage dependent resistor, is available in a
six independent, galvanically separated channels. single phase unit and a three phase unit. Both are mounted on a
1/1 19 inch apparatus plate with compression type terminals.
Optical Ethernet module
The optical Ethernet module (OEM) provides two additional
optical ethernet ports. The port connectors are of LC type.

Serial and LON communication module (SLM) for SPA/IEC


60870-5-103, LON and DNP 3.0
The Serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for
SPA, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. SLM
48 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Layout and dimensions


Dimensions

A
D

IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN

Figure 17. A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6.

B
C

IEC08000163-2-en.vsd
IEC08000163 V2 EN

Figure 15. Case with rear cover

K
F

G
J
H

IEC08000165-2-en.vsdx
IEC08000165 V2 EN

Figure 16. Case with rear cover and 19” rack mounting kit

ABB 49
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Case size A B C D E F G H J K
(mm)/(inches)

6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9/ 223.7/ 242.1/ 255.8/ 205.7/ 190.5/ 203.7/ - 228.6/ -
10.47 8.81 9.53 10.07 8.10 7.50 8.02 9.00

6U, 3/4 x 19” 265.9/ 336.0/ 242.1/ 255.8/ 318.0/ 190.5/ 316.0/ - 228.6/ -
10.47 13.23 9.53 10.07 12.52 7.50 12.4 9.00

6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9/ 448.3/ 242.1/ 255.8/ 430.3/ 190.5/ 428.3/ 465.1/ 228.6/ 482.6/19.00
10.47 17.65 9.53 10.07 16.86 7.50 16.86 18.31 9.00

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.

Mounting alternatives See ordering for details about available mounting alternatives.
• 19” rack mounting kit
• Flush mounting kit with cut-out dimensions:
– 1/2 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 210.1 mm/8.27”
– 3/4 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 322.4 mm/12.69”
– 1/1 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 434.7 mm/17.11”
• Wall mounting kit

50 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

23. Connection diagrams Connection diagram, REL670 2.2, A41X00 1MRK002807-LE


The connection diagrams are delivered in the IED Connectivity
package as part of the product delivery. Connection diagram, REL670 2.2, A42X00 1MRK002807-LF

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be Connection diagram, REL670 2.2, B42X00 1MRK002807-LG
downloaded from http://www.abb.com/protection-control.
Connection diagram, REL670 2.2, D42X00 1MRK002807-LH
Connection diagrams for IEC Customized products
Connection diagrams for ANSI Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.2 1MRK002801-AG
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.2 1MRK002802-AG
Connection diagrams for Configured products

ABB 51
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

24. Technical data

General

Definitions

Reference value The specified value of an influencing factor to which are referred the characteristics of the equipment

Nominal range The range of values of an influencing quantity (factor) within which, under specified conditions, the equipment meets the specified
requirements

Operative range The range of values of a given energizing quantity for which the equipment, under specified conditions, is able to perform its
intended functions according to the specified requirements

Presumptions for Technical Data 6. Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set equal
The technical data stated in this document are only valid under to:
the following circumstances: – √3 × IBase × UBase
7. The rated secondary quantities have the following values:
1. Main current transformers with 1 A or 2 A secondary – Rated secondary phase current I r is either 1 A or 5 A
rating are wired to the IED 1 A rated CT inputs.
depending on selected TRM.
2. Main current transformer with 5 A secondary rating are
– Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage U r is within
wired to the IED 5 A rated CT inputs.
the range from 100 V to 120 V.
3. CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with the
– Rated secondary power for three-phase system Sr = √3
associated main instrument transformers. Note that for
× Ur × Ir
functions which measure an analogue signal which do not
have corresponding primary quantity the 1:1 ratio shall be 8. For operate and reset time testing, the default setting
set for the used analogue inputs on the IED. Example of values of the function are used if not explicitly stated
such functions are: HZPDIF, ROTIPHIZ and STTIPHIZ. otherwise.
4. Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set equal 9. During testing, signals with rated frequency have been
to the rated CT primary current. injected if not explicitly stated otherwise.
5. Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set equal
to the rated primary phase-to-phase voltage.

52 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Energizing quantities, rated values and limits


Analog inputs

Table 10. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer

Description Value

Frequency

Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs

Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A

Operating range (0-100) x Ir

Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)


30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously

Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave

Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A


< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs **)

Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V

Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s


420 V continuously

Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V


< 80 mVA at 220 V

**) all values for individual voltage inputs

Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

ABB 53
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 11. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer

Description Value

Frequency

Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs

Rated current Ir 1A 5A

Operating range (0-1.8) × Ir (0-1.6) × Ir

Thermal withstand 80 × Ir for 1 s 65 × Ir for 1 s


25 × Ir for 10 s 20 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min 8 × Ir for 1 min
1.8 × Ir for 30 min 1.6 × Ir for 30 min
1.1 × Ir continuously 1.1 × Ir continuously

Burden < 200 mVA at Ir < 350 mVA at Ir

Voltage inputs *)

Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V

Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s


420 V continuously

Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V


< 80 mVA at 220 V

*) all values for individual voltage inputs

Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

Table 12. MIM - mA input module

Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:

Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -

Input range ±5, ±10, ±20 mA -


0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA

Power consumption -
each mA board £2W
each mA input £ 0.1 W

Table 13. SFP - Optical ethernet port

Quantity Rated value

Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and redundant links for communication
using any protocol

Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX

Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre

Wave length 1310 nm, Class 1 laser safety

Optical connector Type LC

Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

54 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Auxiliary DC voltage

Table 14. PSM - Power supply module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL ±20%


EL = (100-250) V EL ±20%

Power consumption 50 W typically -

Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -

Binary inputs and outputs

Table 15. BIM - Binary input module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs 16 -

DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%


48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%

Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -

Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz


Release settable 1–30 Hz

Debounce filter Settable 1–20 ms

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be


activated simultaneously with influencing
factors within nominal range.

ABB 55
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 16. BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs 16 -

DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%


48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%

Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -

Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -

Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz


Release settable 1–30 Hz

Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be


activated simultaneously with influencing
factors within nominal range.

Table 17. IOM - Binary input/output module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs 8 -

DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%


48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%

Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max

Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz


Release settable 1-30 Hz

Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be


activated simultaneously with influencing
factors within nominal range.

56 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 18. IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)

Binary outputs 10 2

Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC

Current carrying capacity


Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A

Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms

0.2 s
1.0 s 30 A 0.4 A
10 A 0.4 A

Making capacity at resistive load


220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A


110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated with respect to current consumption but


simultaneously with influencing factors after 5 minutes the temperature rise will
within nominal range. After 6 ms an adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum
additional 24 outputs may be activated. The two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be
activation time for the 96 outputs must not activated continuously due to power
exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated dissipation.
during 1 s. Continued activation is possible

ABB 57
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 19. IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)

Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2

Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC

Test voltage across open contact, 250 V rms 250 V rms


1 min

Current carrying capacity


Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous

Making capacity at inductive


loadwith L/R > 10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A

Making capacity at resistive load


220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
0.4

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A


< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated with respect to current consumption but


simultaneously with influencing factors after 5 minutes the temperature rise will
within nominal range. After 6 ms an adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum
additional 24 outputs may be activated. The two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be
activation time for the 96 outputs must not activated continuously due to power
exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated dissipation.
during 1 s. Continued activation is possible

58 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 20. SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs

Function of quantity Static binary output trip

Rated voltage 48-60 VDC 110-250 VDC

Number of outputs 6 6

Impedance open state ~300 kΩ ~810 kΩ

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min No galvanic separation No galvanic separation

Current carrying capacity:

Continuous 5A 5A

1.0 s 10 A 10 A

Making capacity at capacitive load with the


maximum capacitance of 0.2 μF :

0.2 s 30 A 30 A

1.0 s 10 A 10 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A

60 V/0.75 A 125 V/0.35 A

220 V/0.2 A

250 V/0.15 A

Operating time < 1 ms < 1 ms

Table 21. SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Electromechanical relay outputs

Function of quantity Trip and signal relays

Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC

Number of outputs 6

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms

Current carrying capacity:

Continuous 8A

1.0 s 10 A

Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitance of 0.2


μF:

0.2 s 30 A

1.0 s 10 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A

125 V/0.35 A

220 V/0.2 A

250 V/0.15 A

ABB 59
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 22. BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays

Binary outputs 24

Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms

Current carrying capacity


Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A

Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms


0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A


110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Influencing factors

Table 23. Temperature and humidity influence

Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence

Ambient temperature, operate +20°C -10°C to +55°C 0.02%/°C


value

Relative humidity 10-90% 10-90% -


Operative range 0-95%

Storage temperature - -40°C to +70°C -

Table 24. Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal Influence


range

Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01%/%


Operative range Full wave rectified

Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate ±20% of EL 0.01%/%


value

Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%

100-250 V DC ±20%
Interruption interval
0–50 ms
No restart

0–∞ s Correct behaviour at power down

Restart time < 300 s

60 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 25. Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence

Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz


fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Frequency dependence for distance protection operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±2.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content) 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%

Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10% content) 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%

Harmonic frequency dependence for high impedance differential 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
protection (10% content)

Harmonic frequency dependence for overcurrent protection 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±3.0%

Type tests according to standards

Table 26. Electromagnetic compatibility

Test Type test values Reference standards

1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26

100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave immunity test 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III

Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV

Surge withstand capability test 2.5 kV, oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1


4.0 kV, fast transient

Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26


Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV

Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1


Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge

Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms IEC 60255-26, Zone A


high energy

Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Conducted common mode immunity test 15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV

Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
100 A/m, cont.

Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Class V

Damped oscillatory magnetic field test 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V

Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26

1.4-2.7 GHz

Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2


80-1000 MHz

Conducted electromagnetic field disturbance 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26

Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26

Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC

Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26


ABB 61
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 27. Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard

Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27


ANSI C37.90
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J

Insulation resistance > 100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 28. Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard

Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1

Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1

Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2

Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2

Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C to +70°C IEC 60068-2-14

Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40°C and humidity 93% IEC 60068-2-78

Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55°C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 IEC 60068-2-30
hours)

Table 29. CE compliance

Test According to

Immunity EN 60255–26

Emissivity EN 60255–26

Low voltage directive EN 60255–27

Table 30. Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards

Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1

Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1

Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2

Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2

Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2

Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3

62 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Differential protection

Table 31. High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage (10-900) V ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


I=U/R ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -

Maximum continuous power U>Trip2/SeriesResistor ≤200 W -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min. = 5 ms


Max. = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 x Ud to 0 Min. = 75 ms


Max. = 95 ms

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Ud Min. = 25 ms


Max. = 35 ms

Reset time at 2 x Ud to 0 Min. = 50 ms


Max. = 70 ms

Critical impulse time 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -

Table 32. Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current, zero sequence current (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir

Operate current, low current operation (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir

Operate voltage, phase to neutral (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate voltage, phase to phase (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Independent time delay, zero sequence current at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low current operation at 2 x Iset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 40 ms


whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low voltage operation at 2 x Uset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater

Reset time delay for startup signal at 0 to 2 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater

ABB 63
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Impedance protection

Table 33. Distance measuring zone, Quad ZMQPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -


direction

Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -


current, zone 1

Minimum operate current, phase- (10-1000)% of IBase -


to-phase and phase-to-earth

Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy


±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/phase
Conditions:
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase

Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop

Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -


measured with CVT’s and
0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and Ph- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
E operation

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -


Zreach Max. = 50 ms

64 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 34. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -

Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -


current, zone 1

Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (10-1000)% of IBase -


and Ph-E

Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy


±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase
Conditions:
Zero sequence reactance (0.01-9000.00) Ω/phase Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Fault resistance, Ph-E (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop

Fault resistance, Ph-Ph (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with -


CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and Ph- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is greater
E operation

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -


Zreach Max. = 50 ms

Table 35. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.5% static accuracy


sequence ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Resistive reach, positive (0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
sequence
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase

Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop


faults, forward and reverse

Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop


faults, forward and reverse

Load encroachment criteria:


Load resistance, forward and (1.00–3000.00) Ω/phase
reverse (5-70) degrees
Safety load impedance angle

Reset ratio 105% typically -

ABB 65
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 36. Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones, Ph-E Max 5 with selectable direction -

Minimum operate current (10–30)% of IBase -

Positive sequence impedance, (0.005–3000.000) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy


Ph-E loop Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence impedance (10–90) degrees
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
angle, Ph-E loop
Angle: 85 degrees
Reverse reach, Ph-E loop (0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase
(Magnitude)

Magnitude of earth return (0.00–3.00)


compensation factor KN

Angle for earth compensation (-180–180) degrees


factor KN

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -


with CVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and Ph- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±60 ms whichever is greater
E operation

Operate time 22 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.5 x Zreach to 1.5 x Min. = 30 ms -


Zreach Max. = 50 ms

Table 37. Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -

Minimum operate current (10-30)% of IBase -

Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy


±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase
Conditions:
Zero sequence reactance (0.50-9000.00) Ω/phase Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) W/loop

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with -


CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and Ph- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
E operation

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -


Zreach Max. = 50 ms

66 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 38. Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Load encroachment criteria: Load (1.00–3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy


resistance, forward and reverse (5–70) degrees Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1–1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5–30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Table 39. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -


direction

Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -


current, zone 1

Minimum operate current, phase- (10-1000)% of IBase -


to-phase and phase-to-earth

Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/ ±2.0% static accuracy


phase ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
phase
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/ Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
phase

Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/


phase

Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop

Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -


measured with CVT’s
and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay phase-phase (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater


and phase-earth operation

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -


Zreach Max. =50 ms

ABB 67
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 40. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy


sequence ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Resistive reach, positive (0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
sequence
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase

Fault resistance, Ph-E faults, (1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop


forward and reverse

Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults, (0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop


forward and reverse

Reset ratio 105% typically -

68 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 41. High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones 3 selectable directions, -


3 fixed directions

Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir


and Ph-E

Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) ohm/p Pseudo continuous ramp:


reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ±2.0% of set value
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00) ohm/p
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Ramp of shots:
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00) ohm/p Angle: At 0 degrees and 85 degrees ±2.0% of set value
IEC 60255-121 points A,B,C,D,E Conditions:
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00) ohm/p IEC 60255-121 point B
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E and (0.01 -9000.00) ohm/l
Ph-Ph

Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 degrees -


measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30, IEC
60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Directional blinders Forward: -15 – 120 Pseudo continuous ramp:


degrees ±2.0 degrees, IEC 60255-121
Reverse: 165 – -60
degrees

Resistance determining the load (0.01 - 5000.00) ohm/p Pseudo continuous ramp: Ramp of shots:
impedance area - forward ±2.0% of set value ±5.0% of set value
Conditions: Conditions:
Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees

Angle determining the load 5 - 70 degrees Pseudo continuous ramp:


impedance area ±2.0 degrees
Conditions:
Tested at RLdFw = 20 ohm/p

Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% of set value or ±35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation

Operate time 16 ms typically, IEC -


60255-121

Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

ABB 69
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 42. Power swing detection ZMRPSB

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy


Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach (0.10–1000.00) W/loop

Power swing detection operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is greater


time

Second swing reclaim operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater


time

Minimum operate current (5-30)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Table 43. Power swing logic PSLPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Permitted maximum operating (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater


time difference between
higher and lower zone

Delay for operation of (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater


underreach zone with
detected difference in
operating time

Conditional timer for sending (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
the CS at power swings

Conditional timer for tripping at (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
power swings

Timer for blocking the (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
overreaching zones trip

Table 44. Pole slip protection PSPPPAM

Function Range or value Accuracy

Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/Ir

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

Table 45. Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM

Function Range or value Accuracy

Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/(√3 ⋅ Ir)

Rotor start angle (90.0 - 130.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees

Rotor trip angle (15.0 - 90.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

70 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 46. Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur


and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage

Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -

Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
residual voltage at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2
x Uset

Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater


residual voltage at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8
x Uset

Operating mode No Filter, NoPref


Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a

Table 47. Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur


and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage

Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -

Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
residual voltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset

Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater


residual voltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset

Operating mode No Filter, NoPref


Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a

ABB 71
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 48. Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF

Parameter Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1–100)% of ±0.5% of Ur


UBase

Operate current, detection of dead line (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Time delay to operate for the switch onto fault function (0.03-120.00) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

Time delay for UI detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

Delay time for activation of dead line detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

Drop-off delay time of switch onto fault function (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

72 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Wide area measurement system

Table 49. Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 PMUREPORT

Influencing quantity Range Accuracy

Signal frequency ± 0.1 x fr ≤ 1.0% TVE

Signal magnitude:
Voltage phasor (0.1–1.2) x Ur
Current phasor (0.5–2.0) x Ir

Phase angle ± 180°

Harmonic distortion 10% from 2nd – 50th

Interfering signal:
Magnitude 10% of fundamental signal
Minimum frequency 0.1 x fr
Maximum frequency 1000 Hz

ABB 73
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Current protection

Table 50. Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -


Max. = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 25 ms -


Max. = 40 ms

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

Table 51. Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC

Function Setting range Accuracy

Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Minimum operate current, step 1-4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step 1-4 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Minimum operate time for inverse curves , step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
1-4

Inverse time characteristics, see table 180, 16 curve types See table 180, table 181 and table 182
table 181 and table 182

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 10 x Min. = 5 ms -


Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

74 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 52. Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -


Max. = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 25 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

ABB 75
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 53. Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees


(RCA)

Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±2.5% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step 1-4 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Minimum operate time for inverse curves, step (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
1-4

Inverse time characteristics, see Table 180, 16 curve types See Table 180, Table 181 and Table 182
Table 181 and Table 182

Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Real part of source Z used for current (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -


polarization

Imaginary part of source Z used for current (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -


polarization

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -


Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 10 x Min. = 5 ms -


Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

76 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 54. Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
1-4

Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1 - 4

Inverse time characteristics, see table 180, 16 curve types See table 180, table 181 and table 182
table 181 and table 182

Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4 (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±2.5% of I at I > Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Real part of negative sequence source (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -


impedance used for current polarization

Imaginary part of negative sequence (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -


source impedance used for current
polarization

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 2 Min. = 15 ms -


x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset to Min. = 15 ms -


0 Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 5 ms -


10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -


to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -

ABB 77
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 55. Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate level for 3I0·cosj directional residual (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir


overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for ·3I0·3U0 cosj directional (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr


residual power ±1.0% of S at S > Sr

Operate level for 3I0 and j residual overcurrent (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at £ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non-directional overcurrent (1.00-400.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non-directional residual (1.00-200.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur


overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Residual release current for all directional (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir


modes ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Residual release voltage for all directional (1.00-300.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur


modes ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms


overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 65 ms

Reset time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms


overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 65 ms

Operate time for directional residual Min. = 110 ms


overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 160 ms

Reset time for directional residual overcurrent Min. = 20 ms


at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 60 ms

Independent time delay for non-directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
residual overvoltage at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset

Independent time delay for non-directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset

Independent time delay for directional residual (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 170 ms whichever is greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset

Inverse characteristics, see table 183, 16 curve types See Table 183, Table 184 and Table 185
Table 184 and Table 185

Relay characteristic angle (RCADir) (-179 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operate angle (ROADir) (0 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees

78 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 56. Thermal overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reference current (2-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 - 600)°F ±1.0°C, ±2.0°F

Operate time: Time constant t = (1–1000) IEC 60255-149, ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever is greater
minutes
é ù
ê I - Ip
2 2 ú
t = t ln ê ú
ê 2 2 TTrip - TAmb 2 ú
ê I - Ip - T × I ref
ú
ë ref û
EQUATION13000039 V2 EN (Equation 1)

TTrip= set operate temperature


TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs

Alarm temperature (0-200)°C, (0-400)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

Operate temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

Reset level temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

Table 57. Breaker failure protection CCRBRF

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking of contact function (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -

Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -

Time delay for re-trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Time delay for back-up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Time delay for back-up trip at multi-phase start at 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
to 2 x Iset

Additional time delay for a second back-up trip at 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
to 2 x Iset

Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

ABB 79
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 58. Stub protection STBPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -


Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 10 ms -


Max. = 20 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Table 59. Pole discordance protection CCPDSC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Independent time delay between (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is greater


trip condition and trip signal

Table 60. Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP

Function Range or value Accuracy

Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr


for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
where

S r = 1.732 × U r × I r

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees


for Step 1 and Step 2

Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
and Step 2 at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000

Table 61. Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP

Function Range or value Accuracy

Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr


for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees


for Step 1 and Step 2

Operate time, start at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and Min. =10 ms


k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and Min. = 35 ms


k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms

Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
and Step 2 at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and k=0.000

80 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 62. Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Unbalance current operation (50–90)% of maximum current ±1.0% of Ir

Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min. = 25 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Reset time at current change from 0 to Ir Min. = 5 ms -


Max. = 20 ms

ABB 81
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 63. Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -

Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -


Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start overcurrent at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 2 x (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Iset

Inverse time characteristics, 13 curve types See tables 180 and 181
see tables 180 and 181

Minimum operate time for inverse time (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
characteristics

High voltage limit, voltage dependent (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur


operation

Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Operate time start undervoltage at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time start undervoltage at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Independent time delay to operate, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
undervoltage at 2 x Uset to 0

Internal low voltage blocking (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur

Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically

Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 x Uset to 0
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically

82 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Voltage protection

Table 64. Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Internal blocking level, step 1 and step 2 (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Inverse time characteristics for step 1 and - See table 189


step 2, see table 189

Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 x Uset to 0 (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater

Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 x Uset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater

Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever is greater


characteristics

Operate time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0 -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

ABB 83
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 65. Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 and - See table 188


2, see table 188

Definite time delay, low step (step 1) at 0 to (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
1.2 x Uset

Definite time delay, high step (step 2) at 0 to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
1.2 x Uset

Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater


characteristics

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

84 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 66. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, step 1 - step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics for low and - See table 190


high step, see table 190

Definite time delay low step (step 1) at 0 to (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater
1.2 x Uset

Definite time delay high step (step 2) at 0 to (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater
1.2 x Uset

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Table 67. Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, start (100–180)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U

Operate value, alarm (50–120)% of start level ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate value, high level (100–200)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U

Curve type IEEE or customer defined ±5.0 % or ±45 ms, whichever is greater

(0.18 × k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2

EQUATION1319 V1 EN (Equation 2)

where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)

Minimum time delay for inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
function

Maximum time delay for inverse (0.00–9000.00) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
function

Alarm time delay (0.00–9000.00) ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater

ABB 85
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 68. Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Voltage difference for alarm and trip (2.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Independent time delay for voltage differential (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
alarm at 0.8 x UDAlarm to 1.2 x UDAlarm

Independent time delay for voltage differential (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
trip at 0.8 x UDTrip to 1.2 x UDTrip

Independent time delay for voltage differential (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
reset at 1.2 x UDTrip to 0.8 x UDTrip

Table 69. Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Pulse timer when disconnecting (0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater


all three phases

Time delay for enabling the (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
functions after restoration

Operate time delay when (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater


disconnecting all three phases

Time delay to block when all three (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
phase voltages are not low

Table 70. Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Residual current detection (10 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (50 - 150)% of IBase -

Operate time, residual current detection at 0 to 2 Min. = 15 ms -


x Iset
Max. = 30 ms

Independent time delay to operate, residual (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
current detection at 0 to 2 x Iset

Voltage based phase selection (30 - 100)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur

Reset ratio <115% -

Operate time, voltage-based phase selection at Min. = 15 ms -


1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset
Max. = 30 ms

Independent time delay to operate, voltage- (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
based phase selection at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset

86 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Frequency protection

Table 71. Underfrequency protection SAPTUF

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, start function, at symmetrical three (35.00-75.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz


phase voltage

Operate time, start at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz Min. = 80 ms


fn = 50 Hz
Max. = 95 ms
-
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms

Reset time, start at fset - 0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms


-
Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time function at fset + 0.02 Hz to (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is greater
fset - 0.02 Hz

Reset time, definite time function at fset - 0.02 Hz to fset (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is greater
+ 0.02 Hz

Voltage dependent time delay Settings: ±1.0% or ±100 ms whichever is greater


UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase
Exponent=0.0-5.0
tMax=(0.010–60.000)s
tMin=(0.010–60.000)s

Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
ë UNom - UMin úû
EQUATION1182 V1 EN (Equation 3)

U=Umeasured

Table 72. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, start function at symmetrical three-phase voltage (35.00-90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz

Operate time, start at fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz Min. = 80 ms -


fn = 50Hz
Max. = 95 ms

Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms

Reset time, start at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±100 ms
whichever is greater

Reset time, definite time function at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±120 ms,
whichever is greater

ABB 87
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 73. Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s

Operate value, restore enable frequency (45.00-65.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz

Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is


greater

Definite time delay for frequency gradient trip (0.200-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is
greater

Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is


greater

88 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Multipurpose protection

Table 74. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Measuring current input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -


NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2,
phase2-phase3, phase3-phase1,
MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-
Ph

Measuring voltage input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -


NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2,
phase2-phase3, phase3-phase1,
MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-
Ph

Start overcurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Start undercurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay, overcurrent at 0 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2

Independent time delay, undercurrent at 2 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
x Iset to 0, step 1 - 2

Overcurrent (non-directional):

Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Start time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -


Max. = 20 ms

Reset time at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Undercurrent:

Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Overcurrent:

Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 180, 181 and table 182
180, 181 and table 182

Overcurrent:

Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1 - 2

Voltage level where voltage memory takes (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
over

Start overvoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

ABB 89
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 74. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC , continued


Function Range or value Accuracy

Start undervoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Independent time delay, overvoltage at 0.8 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
x Uset to 1.2 x Uset, step 1 - 2

Independent time delay, undervoltage at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset, step 1 - 2

Overvoltage:

Start time at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Undervoltage:

Start time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Overvoltage:

Inverse time characteristics, see table 188 4 curve types See table 188

Undervoltage:

Inverse time characteristics, see table 189 3 curve types See table 189

High and low voltage limit, voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
dependent operation, step 1 - 2 ±1.0% of U at U > Ur

Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse -

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -

Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -

Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -

Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Overcurrent:

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undercurrent:

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Overvoltage:

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -


Uset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

90 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 74. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC , continued


Function Range or value Accuracy

Undervoltage:

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -


Uset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

ABB 91
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Secondary system supervision

Table 75. Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±10.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±5.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

Table 76. Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Ur

Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir

Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 10 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Table 77. Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, block of main fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio <110%

Operate time, block of main fuse failure at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 5 ms –

Max. = 15 ms

Reset time, block of main fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –

Max. = 30 ms

Operate value, alarm for pilot fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio <110% –

Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 5 ms –

Max. = 15 ms

Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –

Max. = 30 ms

92 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Control

Table 78. Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check SESRSYN

Function Range or value Accuracy

Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage high limit for synchronizing and synchrocheck (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -

Frequency difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz

Phase angle difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Voltage difference limit between bus and line for synchronizing and (0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Ur
synchrocheck

Time delay output for synchrocheck when angle difference between bus (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees greater

Frequency difference minimum limit for synchronizing (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz

Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing (0.050-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz

Maximum closing angle between bus and line for synchronizing (15-30) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-1.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is


greater

tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing function if no close has been made (0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
before set time greater

Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is


greater

Voltage high limit for energizing check (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for energizing check (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -

Maximum voltage for energizing (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Time delay for energizing check when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% of (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
Urated greater

Operate time for synchrocheck function when angle difference between bus Min. = 15 ms –
and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees Max. = 30 ms

Operate time for energizing function when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% of Min. = 70 ms –
Urated Max. = 90 ms

ABB 93
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 79. Autorecloser SMBRREC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Dead time:
shot 1 “t1 1Ph” (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 1 “t1 2Ph” whichever is greater
shot 1 “t1 3Ph “
shot 1 “t1 3PhHS”

Dead time: (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms


shot 2 “t2 3Ph” whichever is greater
shot 3 “t3 3Ph”
shot 4 “t4 3Ph”
shot 5 “t5 3Ph”

Extend three-phase dead time duration “tExtended t1” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
whichever is greater

Minimum time that circuit breaker must be closed before new sequence is allowed (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
“tCBClosedMin” whichever is greater

Wait time for the slave to close when WAIT input has reset “tSlaveDeadTime” (0.100-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
whichever is greater

Maximum allowed start pulse duration “tLongStartInh” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms


whichever is greater

Circuit breaker closing pulse duration “tPulse” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms


whichever is greater

Reclaim time ”tReclaim” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms


whichever is greater

Maximum wait time for release from master “tWaitForMaster” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater

Reset time for reclosing inhibit “tInhibit” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms


whichever is greater

Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot “tAutoContWait” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater

Maximum wait time for fulfilled synchrocheck conditions “tSync” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater

Delay time before indicating successful reclosing “tSuccessful” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±50 ms
whichever is greater

Maximum wait time for circuit breaker closing before indicating unsuccessful “tUnsucCl” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater

94 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Scheme communication

Table 80. Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Scheme type Off -


Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking

Operate voltage, Delta U (0–100)% of UBase ±5.0% of ΔU

Operate current, Delta I (0–200)% of IBase ±5.0% of ΔI

Operate zero sequence voltage, (0–100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Δ3U0


Delta 3U0

Operate zero sequence current, (0–200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Δ3I0


Delta 3I0

Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater


communication scheme

Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater


signal

Security timer for loss of guard signal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
detection

Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -


NoRestart
Restart

Table 81. Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Scheme type Intertrip -


Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking

Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater


communication scheme

Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater


signal

Table 82. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection ZCRWPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Detection level phase-to-neutral (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur


voltage

Detection level phase-to-phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur


voltage

Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
logic

Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater


infeed logic

ABB 95
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 83. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Detection level phase to neutral (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur


voltage

Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur


voltage

Reset ratio <105% at (20-90)% of UBase -

Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater


infeed logic

Table 84. Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Scheme type Permissive Underreaching -


Permissive Overreaching
Blocking

Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater


coordination time

Table 85. Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current, LoadCurr (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Operate current, MinCurr (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Delay time on pick-up for current release (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Delay time on drop-off for current release (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Delay time on pick-up for MinCurr value (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Table 86. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate mode of WEI logic Off -


Echo
Echo & Trip

Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI trip (5-70)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
logic

Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

Coordination time for weak-end (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater


infeed logic

96 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Direct transfer trip

Table 87. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, low active power (2.0-100.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr

Reset ratio, low active power <105% -

Operate value, low power factor 0.00-1.00 ±0.02

Independent time delay to operate for low (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
active power at 1.2 x Pset to 0.8 x Pset

Independent time delay to operate for low (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
power factor at 1.2 x PFset to 0.8 x PFset

Critical impulse time, low active power 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Pset to 0.8 x -
Pset

Impulse margin time, low active power 10 ms typically -

Table 88. Compensated over- and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, undervoltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0,5% of Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.00–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Critical impulse time, undervoltage 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -


Uset

Impulse margin time, undervoltage 15 ms typically -

Operate value, overvoltage (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur


± 0.5% of U at U>Ur

Critical impulse time, overvoltage 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -


Uset

Impulse margin time, overvoltage 15 ms typically -

Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater


undervoltage functionality at 1.2 x Uset
to 0.8 x Uset

Independent time delay for overvoltage (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
functionality at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset

Table 89. Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, overcurrent (5-100)% of IBase ±2.0% of Ir

Hold time for operate signal at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater

ABB 97
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 90. Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operation mode 1 Out Of 2 -


2 Out Of 2

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is


greater

Table 91. Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, negative sequence (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur


overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U>Ur

Reset ratio, negative sequence >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -


overvoltage

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Critical impulse time, negative sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -


overvoltage

Impulse margin time, negative sequence 15 ms typically -


overvoltage

Independent time delay to operate at 0 to (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater


1.2 x Uset

Table 92. Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, zero sequence overvoltage (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, zero sequence overvoltage >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Critical impulse time, zero sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -


overvoltage

Impulse margin time, zero sequence 15 ms typically -


overvoltage

Independent time delay to operate at 0 to (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater


1.2 x Uset

98 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 93. Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, negative sequence (3 - 2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, negative sequence overcurrent >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -


Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time, negative sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -


overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, negative sequence 15 ms typically -


overcurrent

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms, whichever is greater

Transient overreach, start function <10% at τ = 100 ms -

Table 94. Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, zero sequence overcurrent (3-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir


±1.0% of I at I>Ir

Reset ratio, zero sequence overcurrent >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -


Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time, zero sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -


overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, zero sequence 15 ms typically -


overcurrent

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

ABB 99
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 95. Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, overcurrent (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir


±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -


Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time, overcurrent 3 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -


1 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, overcurrent 10 ms typically -

Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater


Iset

Table 96. Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, undercurrent (1.00-100.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% at (50.00-100.00)% of -


IBase

Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -


Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -


Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time, undercurrent 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -

Impulse margin time, undercurrent 10 ms typically -

Independent time delay to operate at 2 x Iset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

100 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Logic

Table 97. Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -

Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Table 98. Number of SMPPTRC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

SMPPTRC 12 - -

Table 99. Number of SMAGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

SMAGAPC 12 - -

Table 100. Number of STARTCOMB instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

STARTCOMB 32 - -

Table 101. Number of TMAGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

TMAGAPC 6 6 -

Table 102. Number of ALMCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

ALMCALH - - 5

Table 103. Number of WRNCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

WRNCALH - - 5

Table 104. Number of INDCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INDCALH - 5 -

ABB 101
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 105. Number of AND instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

AND 60 60 160

Table 106. Number of GATE instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

GATE 10 10 20

Table 107. Number of INV instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INV 90 90 240

Table 108. Number of LLD instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

LLD 10 10 20

Table 109. Number of OR instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

OR 78 60 160

Table 110. Number of PULSETIMER instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

Table 111. Number of RSMEMORY instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

RSMEMORY 10 10 20

Table 112. Number of SRMEMORY instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

SRMEMORY 10 10 20

102 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 113. Number of TIMERSET instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

Table 114. Number of XOR instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

XOR 10 10 20

Table 115. Number of ANDQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

ANDQT - 20 100

Table 116. Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INDCOMBSPQT - 10 10

Table 117. Number of INDEXTSPQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INDEXTSPQT - 10 10

Table 118. Number of INVALIDQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INVALIDQT 10 6 6

Table 119. Number of INVERTERQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INVERTERQT - 20 100

Table 120. Number of ORQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

ORQT - 20 100

ABB 103
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 121. Number of PULSETIMERQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

PULSETIMERQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

Table 122. Number of RSMEMORYQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

RSMEMORYQT - 10 30

Table 123. Number of SRMEMORYQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

SRMEMORYQT - 10 30

Table 124. Number of TIMERSETQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

TIMERSETQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

Table 125. Number of XORQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

XORQT - 10 30

Table 126. Number of instances in the extension logic package

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

SLGAPC 10 10 54

VSGAPC 10 10 100

AND 40 40 100

OR 40 40 100

PULSETIMER 20 20 49

GATE — — 49

TIMERSET 30 30 49

XOR 10 10 69

LLD — — 49

SRMEMORY 10 10 110

INV 40 40 100

RSMEMORY 10 10 20

104 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 127. Number of B16I instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

B16I 6 4 8

Table 128. Number of BTIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

BTIGAPC 4 4 8

Table 129. Number of IB16 instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

IB16 6 4 8

Table 130. Number of ITBGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

ITBGAPC 4 4 8

Table 131. Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC

Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy

Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is


greater

100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is


greater

Table 132. Number of TEIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

TEIGAPC 4 4 4

Table 133. Number of INTCOMP instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INTCOMP 10 10 10

Table 134. Number of REALCOMP instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

REALCOMP 10 10 10

ABB 105
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Monitoring

Table 135. Power system measurement CVMMXN

Function Range or value Accuracy

Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ±2.0 mHz

Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U≤ 50 V


±0.2% of U at U> 50 V

Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir< I < 0.2 x Ir


± 0.5% of I at 0.2 x Ir< I < 0.5 x Ir
±0.2% of I at 0.5 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Active power, P (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr


(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P


(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ< 0.7

Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr


(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q


(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ> 0.7

Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr


(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S


(0.5-2.0) x Ir

Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02


(0.1-4.0) x Ir

(100 to 220) V <0.01


(0.5-2.0) x Ir

Table 136. Current measurement CMMXU

Function Range or value Accuracy

Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir


±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir

Table 137. Voltage measurement phase-phase VMMXU

Function Range or value Accuracy

Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V


±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V


±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

106 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 138. Voltage measurement phase-earth VNMMXU

Function Range or value Accuracy

Voltage (5 to 175) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V


±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Phase angle (5 to 175) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V


±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

Table 139. Current sequence measurement CMSQI

Function Range or value Accuracy

Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir


Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Current zero sequence, 3I0 Three (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir


phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir


Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir


±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir

Table 140. Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI

Function Range or value Accuracy

Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V


±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V


±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V


±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V


±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

Table 141. Supervision of mA input signals

Function Range or value Accuracy

mA measuring function ±5, ±10, ±20 mA ±0.1 % of set value ±0.005 mA


0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA

Max current of transducer to (-20.00 to +20.00) mA


input

Min current of transducer to (-20.00 to +20.00) mA


input

Alarm level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

Warning level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

Alarm hysteresis for input (0.0-20.0) mA

ABB 107
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 142. Disturbance report DRPRDRE

Function Range or value Accuracy

Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -

Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -

Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -

Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 175

Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -


derived)

Maximum number of binary inputs 352 -

Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording 30 -

Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report 352 -

Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording 150 -

Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of 340 seconds (100 recordings) at -
channels, typical value) 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz

Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -


1.2 kHz at 60 Hz

Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

Table 143. Insulation supervision for gas medium function SSIMG

Function Range or value Accuracy

Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value

Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value

Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value

Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value

Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Reset time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

108 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 144. Insulation supervision for liquid medium function SSIML

Function Range or value Accuracy

Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value

Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value

Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value

Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value

Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Table 145. Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR

Function Range or value Accuracy

Alarm level for open and close travel time (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms

Alarm level for number of operations (0 – 9999) -

Independent time delay for spring charging time (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
alarm

Independent time delay for gas pressure alarm (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

Independent time delay for gas pressure lockout (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

CB Contact Travel Time, opening and closing ±3 ms

Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations

Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is greater

Table 146. Fault locator LMBRFLO

Function Value or range Accuracy

Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy


Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir

Phase selection According to input signals -

Maximum number of fault 100 -


locations

Table 147. Event list

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000

Resolution 1 ms

Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing

ABB 109
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 148. Indications

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance 352

Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100

Table 149. Event recorder

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150

Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

Resolution 1 ms

Accuracy Depending on time


synchronizing

Table 150. Trip value recorder

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 30

Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

Table 151. Disturbance recorder

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40

Maximum number of binary inputs 352

Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz
channels, typical value) 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz

Table 152. Event counter with limit supervision L4UFCNT

Function Range or value Accuracy

Counter value 0-65535 -

Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

Table 153. Running hour-meter TEILGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time limit for alarm supervision, tAlarm (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value

Time limit for warning supervision, tWarning (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value

Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%

110 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Metering

Table 154. Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT

Function Setting range Accuracy

Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -

Cycle time for report of counter (1–3600) s -


value

Table 155. Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR

Function Range or value Accuracy

Energy metering kWh Export/Import, kvarh Export/ Input from MMXU. No extra error at steady load
Import

ABB 111
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Station communication

Table 156. Communication protocols

Function Value

Protocol IEC 61850-8-1

Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

Protocol IEC 60870–5–103

Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd

Protocol DNP3.0

Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd

Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet

Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s

Protocol LON

Communication speed for the IEDs 1.25 Mbit/s

Protocol SPA

Communication speed for the IEDs 300–38400 Bd

Table 157. IEC 61850-9-2 communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol IEC 61850-9-2

Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

Table 158. LON communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol LON

Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

Table 159. SPA communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol SPA

Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd

Slave number 1 to 899

Table 160. IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol IEC 60870-5-103

Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

112 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 161. SLM – LON port

Quantity Range or value

Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST


Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in

Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)


Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)

Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm


Plastic fiber: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

Table 162. SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Quantity Range or value

Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST


Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in

Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)


Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)

Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm


Plastic fiber: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

Table 163. Galvanic RS485 communication module

Quantity Range or value

Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds

External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector


Soft ground 2-pole connector

Table 164. Ethernet redundancy protocols, IEC 62439-3

Function Value

Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.1 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP-0)

Communication speed 100Base-FX

Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.2 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP-1)

Communication speed 100Base-FX

Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.2 High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

Communication speed 100Base-FX

Connectors Optical, type LC

ABB 113
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Remote communication

Table 165. Line data communication module

Characteristic Range or value

Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)

Type of fiber Graded-index multimode Singlemode 9/125 µm Singlemode 9/125 µm


62.5/125 µm

Graded-index multimode 50/125


µm

Peak Emission Wave length


Nominal 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Maximum 865 nm 1330 nm 1580 nm
Minimum 792 nm 1290 nm 1520 nm

Optical budget 13 dB (typical distance about 3 22 dB (typical distance 80 km/50 26 dB (typical distance 110
Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm km/2 mile *) mile *) km/68 mile *)

Graded-index multimode 50/125 mm 9 dB (typical distance about 2


km/1 mile *)

Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC

Protocol C37.94 C37.94 implementation **) C37.94 implementation **)

Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous

Transmission rate / Data rate 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s

Clock source Internal or derived from received Internal or derived from received Internal or derived from received
signal signal signal

*) depending on optical budget calculation


**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94

114 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Hardware
IED

Table 166. Case

Material Steel sheet

Front plate Stainless steel with cut-out for HMI

Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel

Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

Table 167. Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP40

Rear side IP20 with screw compression type


IP10 with ring lug terminals

Table 168. Weight

Case size Weight

6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 10 kg/22 lb

6U, 3/4 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb

6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 18 kg/40 lb

Electrical safety

Table 169. Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27

Equipment class I (protective earthed)

Overvoltage category III

Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by
condensation is to be expected)

Connection system

Table 170. CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)


2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)

Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)

Table 171. Auxiliary power supply and binary I/O connectors

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)


2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)

Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)

Because of limitations of space, when ring between two adjacent IO modules. Please
lug terminal is ordered for Binary I/O refer to the ordering particulars for details.
connections, one blank slot is necessary

ABB 115
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 172. NUM: Number of Ethernet ports

NUM 4 Ethernet ports


1 Basic, 3 Optional

Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC

Carrier modules supported OEM, LDCM

Table 173. OEM: Number of Ethernet ports

OEM 2 Ethernet Ports

Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC

116 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Basic IED functions

Table 174. Self supervision with internal event list

Data Value

Recording manner Continuous, event controlled

List size 40 events, first in-first out

Table 175. Time synchronization, time tagging

Function Value

Time tagging accuracy of the synchrophasor data ± 1 µs

Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms

Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), events and sampled ± 1.0 ms typically
measurement values

Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically

Table 176. Time synchronization PTP: IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3

Supported types of clock Boundary Clock (BC), Ordinary Clock (OC), Transparent Clock (TC)

Accuracy According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3

Number of nodes According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3

Ports supported All rear Ethernet ports

Table 177. GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

Function Range or value Accuracy

Receiver – ±1µs relative UTC

Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes –


position or after power loss longer than 1 month

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer <15 minutes –
than 48 hours

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter <5 minutes –
than 48 hours

Table 178. GPS – Antenna and cable

Function Value

Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz

Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm

Lightning protection Must be provided externally

Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end


TNC in antenna end

Accuracy +/-1μs

ABB 117
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 179. IRIG-B

Quantity Rated value

Number of channels IRIG-B 1

Number of optical channels 1

Electrical connector:

Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC

Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp

Amplitude modulated
– low level 1-3 Vpp
– high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp

Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x

Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x

Input impedance 100 k ohm

Optical connector:

Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST

Type of fibre 62.5/125 μm multimode fibre

Supported formats IRIG-B 00x

Accuracy +/- 1μs

118 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Inverse characteristic

Table 180. ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,


1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±2.0% or ±40 ms
æ
A
ö whichever is greater
t=ç + B ÷ × k + tDef
è
P
(
çç I - 1 ÷÷
ø)
EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

ABB 119
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 181. IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%


1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01


Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
Reset characteristic:

TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 182. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy

RI type inverse characteristic 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%


1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

120 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 183. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,


1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±5.0% or ±160 ms
æ
A
ö whichever is greater
t=ç + B ÷ × k + tDef
è (
çç I P - 1
)
÷÷
ø
EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

ABB 121
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 184. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%


1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01


Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
Reset characteristic:

TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 185. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

RI type inverse characteristic 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%


1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

122 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 186. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,


± 5.0% or ±40 ms
æ
A
ö whichever is greater
t=ç + B ÷ × k + tDef
è (
çç I P - 1
)
÷÷
ø
EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

Table 187. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%


or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

ABB 123
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 188. Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms


whichever is greater
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  

IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01


A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
k×A B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
t = +D C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
P
æB × U - U > ö D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ç -C÷
è U > ø P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN

124 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 189. Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms


whichever is greater
k
t =
æ U < -U
ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
EQUATION1431-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø
EQUATION1432-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01


A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
é ù B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
ê k×A
ú C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
t =ê ú+D D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ê æ U < -U ö
P
ú P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè U < ø û
EQUATION1433-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

ABB 125
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 190. Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of ±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is greater


0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of


0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
EQUATION1437-SMALL V2 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of


0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
EQUATION1438-SMALL V2 EN

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of


0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
ç -C÷
è U > ø of 0.01
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001

126 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

25. Ordering for customized IED

Table 191. General guidelines

Guidelines
Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.
Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.
PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.

Table 192. Example ordering code

To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the selection tables, as given in the example below.
The selected qty of each table must be filled in, if no selection is possible the code is 0
Example of a complete code: REL670*2.2-F00X00 - A000003000000001 - B55200002202000010110210000 - C3300332122020022241000300 - D22212011 - E22200
- F4 - S6 - G032 - H20401100000 - K20201111 - L1100 - M0610 - P11100000000000100 - B1X0 - AC - CA - B - A3X0 - CD1D1ARGN1N1XXXXXXX - KKKXXHKKLAGXSY

Product definition - Differential protection -


REL670* 2.2 - F00 X00 - A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -

Impedance protection -
B 1 0 0 0 0 -

Current protection -
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0 -

Voltage protection - Frequency protection - Multipurpose - General -


protection calculation
D 0 1 - E 00 - F - S -

Secondary system supervision - Control -


G - H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -

Scheme communication - Logic - Monitoring - Station communication -


K - L 00 - M 1 0 - P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -

Language - Casing and - Power - HMI - Analog input - Binary input/output -


mounting supply
B1 - - - - - -

Station communication, remote end serial communication and time synchronization


K

Table 193. Product definition

REL670* 2.2 F00 X00

Table 194. Product definition ordering codes

Product REL670*
Software version 2.2
Configuration alternative
Line distance protection REL670 F00
ACT configuration
ABB Standard configuration X00

Table 195. Differential protection

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ABB 127
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 196. Differential functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF 1MRK005904-HB 6 0-3
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC 1MRK005904-TA 15 0-1

Table 197. Impedance protection

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
B 1 0 0 0 0

128 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 198. Impedance functions, alternatives

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Note: One and only one of alternatives 1 to 6 must be selected. *) Selected qty = 0 for functions in unselected alternatives.
Alternative 1 Distance protection, quadrilateral
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS, 1MRK005907-AA 1 1-5 *)
ZMQAPDIS
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 1-2 *)
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 2 *)
Alternative 2 Distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 2 *)
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series ZMCPDIS, 1MRK005907-DA 4 1-6 *)
compensated lines ZMCAPDIS
Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series ZDSRDIR 1MRK005907-EA 5 1-2 *)
compensation
Alternative 3 Distance protection, mho (mho for phase - phase fault and mho in parallel with quad for earth fault)
Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic ZMHPDIS 1MRK005907-FA 6 1-5 *)
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS, 1MRK005907-GA 7 1-5 *)
ZMMAPDIS
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 1-2 *)
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 1-2 *)
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC 1MRK005907-LB 10 1 *)
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 2 *)
Alternative 4 Distance protection, quadrilateral with separate settings for PP and PE
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 1-2 *)
Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic separate Ph-Ph ZMRPDIS, 1MRK005907-NA 12 1-5 *)
and Ph-E settings ZMRAPDIS
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS 1MRK005907-PA 13 2 *)
Alternative 5 High speed distance protection, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection, quad and mho characteristic ZMFPDIS 1MRK005907-SC 14 1-2 *)
Alternative 6 High speed distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection for series comp. lines, quad and ZMFCPDIS 1MRK005907-RC 15 1-2 *)
mho characteristic
Optional with alternative 1
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 0-2
Optional with alternative 3
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 0-2
Optional with alternatives 1, 2 and 4
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 0-2
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 0-2
Optional with alternatives 1, 2, 3 and 4
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ 1MRK005908-DB 16 0-1
Optional with alternative 5 and 6
Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ 1MRK005908-DC 17 0-1
Optional with any alternative
Power swing detection ZMRPSB 1MRK005907-UA 18 0-1
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based ZCVPSOF 1MRK005908-AA 19 1
Power swing logic PSLPSCH 1MRK005907-VA 20 0-1
PoleSlip/Out-of-step protection PSPPPAM 1MRK005908-CB 21 0-2
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 1MRK005908-GA 22 0-1

Table 199. Current protection

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0

ABB 129
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 200. Current functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC 1MRK005910-AD 1 0-3
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC 1MRK005910-BC 2 0-3
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC 1MRK005910-DD 4 0-3
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC 1MRK005910-EE 5 0-3
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent NS4PTOC 1MRK005910-FB 6 0-2
protection
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE 1MRK005910-GA 7 0-1
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius LCPTTR 1MRK005911-BA 8 0-2
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Fahrenheit LFPTTR 1MRK005911-AA 9 0-2
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF 1MRK005910-LA 11 0-2
Stub protection STBPTOC 1MRK005910-NC 13 0-2
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 1MRK005910-PA 14 0-2
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 1MRK005910-RA 15 0-2
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 1MRK005910-TA 16 0-2
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC 1MRK005910-SA 17 1
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection VRPVOC 1MRK005910-XA 21 0-3

Table 201. Voltage protection

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D 0 1

Table 202. Voltage functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 1MRK005912-AA 1 0-2
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 1MRK005912-BA 2 0-2
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 1MRK005912-CC 3 0-2
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 1MRK005912-DA 4 0-1
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV 1MRK005912-EA 5 0-2
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV 1MRK005912-GA 7 1
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC 1MRK005912-HA 8 0-1

Table 203. Frequency protection

Position 1 2 3 4
E 00

Table 204. Frequency functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 1MRK005914-AC 1 0-6
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 1MRK005914-BB 2 0-6
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC 1MRK005914-CB 3 0-6

Table 205. Multipurpose protection

Position 1
F

Table 206. Multipurpose functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 1MRK005915-AA 1 0-4

130 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 207. General calculation

Position 1
S

Table 208. General calculation functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC 1MRK005915-KB 1 0-6

Table 209. Secondary system supervision

Position 1 2 3
G

Table 210. Secondary system supervision functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC 1MRK005916-AC 1 0-2
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC 1MRK005916-BA 2 0-3
Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference VDSPVC 1MRK005916-CA 3 0-2

Table 211. Control

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 212. Control functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing SESRSYN 1MRK005917-AC 1 0-2
Autorecloser SMBRREC 1MRK005917-BC 3 0-4
Control functionality for a single bay, max 10 objects (1CB), APC10 1MRK005917-AZ 5 0-1 Only one type of
including interlocking control functionality
can be ordered.
Control functionality for a single bay, max 15 objects (2CB), APC15 1MRK005917-BZ 6 0-1
including interlocking

Table 213. Scheme communication

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K

Table 214. Scheme communication functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking scheme ZCPSCH 1MRK005920-AA 1 0-2 Only one of
signal transmit ZCPSCH/
ZC1PPSCH can be
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance ZC1PPSCH 1MRK005920-BA 2 0-2
ordered.
protection
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection ZCRWPSCH 1MRK005920-CA 3 0-2 Only one of
ZCRWPSCH/
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated ZC1WPSCH 1MRK005920-DA 4 0-2
ZC1WPSCH can be
communication
ordered.
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH 1MRK005920-EA 5 0-1
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH 1MRK005920-FA 6 0-1
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent ECRWPSCH 1MRK005920-GA 7 0-1
protection
Direct transfer trip DTT 1MRK005921-AX 8 0-1

Table 215. Logic

Position 1 2 3
L 00

ABB 131
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 216. Logic functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Configurable logic blocks Q/T 1MRK005922-MX 1 0-1
Extension logic package 1MRK005922-AZ 2 0-1

Table 217. Monitoring

Position 1 2 3
M 1 0

Table 218. Monitoring functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 1MRK005924-HA 1 00–06
Fault locator LMBRFLO 1MRK005925-XB 2 1

Table 219. Station communication

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 220. Station communication functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules


identification qty qty
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 8 merging units 1MRK005933-HA 1 0-1
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol PRP 1MRK005932-FA 2 0-1 PRP or HSR require
two SFPs placed in
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy HSR 1MRK005932-NA 3 0-1
pairs.
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors 1MRK005933-DA 15 0-1

Table 221. Language selection

Language Ordering no Selection Notes and rules


First local HMI user dialogue language
HMI language, English IEC 1MRK002930-AA B1
Additional local HMI user dialogue language
No additional HMI language X0
HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB A12
Selected B1

Table 222. Casing selection

Casing Ordering no Selection Notes and rules


1/2 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VA A
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VB B
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VE C
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VC D
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VD E
Selected

132 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 223. Mounting selection

Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case or 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 1MRK002420-BB A
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRHGS6 1MRK002420-BA B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case 1MRK002420-CA C
Wall mounting kit 1MRK002420-DA D Wall mounting not recommended
with communication modules with
fibre connection
Flush mounting kit 1MRK002420-PA E
Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal 1MRK002420-NA F
Selected

Table 224. Power supply module selection

Power supply module Ordering no Selection Notes and rules


Compression terminals 1MRK002960-GA C
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-HA R
Power supply module 24-60 VDC 1MRK002239-AB A
Power supply module 90-250 VDC 1MRK002239-BB B
Selected

Table 225. Human machine interface selection

Human machine hardware interface Case size Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", IEC 1MRK000028-AA B
3/4 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-CA
1/1 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-BA
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", ANSI 1MRK000028-AB C
3/4 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-CB
1/1 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-BB
Selected

ABB 133
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 226. Analog system selection

Analog system Ordering no Selection Notes and rules


When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug).
Slot position (front view/rear view)

P40/X401

P41/X411
No Transformer input module included X0 X0 Only valid if IEC 61850-9-2
Process bus communication is
selected.
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BG A3 A3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BH A4 A4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BK A5 A5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AG A6 A6
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AH A7 A7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DG A8
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DH A9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AP A12 A12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AR A13 A13
TRM 6I 5A + 1I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AU A14 A14
TRM 3I 5A + 4I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AV A15 A15
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AE A16 A16
TRM 3IM 1A + 4IP 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-EA A17 A17
TRM 3IM 5A + 4IP 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-EB A18 A18
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BC B3 B3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BD B4 B4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BF B5 B5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AC B6 B6
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AD B7 B7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DC B8
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DD B9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AS B12 B12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AT B13 B13
TRM 6I 5A + 1I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AX B14 B14
TRM 3I 5A + 4I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AY B15 B15
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AF B16 B16
TRM 3IM 1A + 4IP 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-EC B17 B17
TRM 3IM 5A + 4IP 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-ED B18 B18
Selected

Table 227. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with compression terminals

When ordering I/O modules, observe the maximum quantities according to the tables below.

Note: Standard order of location for I/O modules is BIM-BOM-SOM-IOM-MIM from left to right as seen from the rear side of the IED, but can
also be freely placed.
Note: The maximum quantity of I/O modules depends on the type of connection terminals.
Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/ MIM Maximum in case
SOM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 14 6 4 4 14 *)
one (1) TRM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 11 6 4 4 11 *)
two (2) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 8 6 4 4 8 *)
one (1) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 5 5 4 4 5 *)
two (2) TRM
1/2 x 19” rack casing, 3 3 3 1 3
one (1) TRM
*) including a combination of maximum four modules of type BOM, SOM and MIM

134 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 228. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with ringlug terminals

Note: Only every second slot can be used.


Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/ MIM Maximum in case
SOM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 7 6 4 4 7 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11, P13, P15
one (1) TRM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 5 5 4 4 5 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11
two (2) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 4 4 4 4 4 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9
one (1) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 2 2 2 2 2, possible locations: P3, P5
two (2) TRM
1/2 x 19” rack casing, 1 1 1 1 1, possible location: P3
one (1) TRM
**) including a combination of maximum four modules of type BOM, SOM and MIM

ABB 135
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 229. Binary input/output module selection

Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules


output modules
Slot position (front

P3/X31

P4/X41

P5/X51

P6/X61

P7/X71

P8/X81

P9/X91

P10/X101

P11/X111

P12/X121

P13/X131

P14/X141

P15/X151

P16/X161
view/rear view)

1/2 case with 1 TRM █ █ █ These black marks


indicate the maximum
3/4 case with 1 TRM █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
number of modules per
3/4 case with 2 TRM █ █ █ █ █ casing type and the slots
1/1 case with 1 TRM █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ that can be occupied.

1/1 case with 2 TRM █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █


Compression 1MRK002960-KA C
terminals
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-LA R Only every second slot
can be used; see Table
228
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output 1MRK000614-AB A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
module 24 output
relays (BOM)
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-DD B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-AD C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-BD D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CD E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CE E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
RL220,
220-250VDC,
120mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-HA F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-EA G G G G G G G G G G G G G G
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-FA H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-GA K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-GD L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
10+2 outputs,
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-AE M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1
10+2 outputs,
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-BE N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
10+2 outputs,
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA

136 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 229. Binary input/output module selection, continued


Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
output modules
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-CE P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs 10+2 1MRK000173-CF P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
outputs, RL220,
220-250VDC,
110mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-GC U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL24,
24-30VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-AD V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL48,
48-60VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-BD W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-CD Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
mA input module 1MRK000284-AB R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
MIM 6 channels
SOM Static output 1MRK002614-BA T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 SOM must not to be
module, 12 placed in the position
outputs; 6 nearest to NUM: 1/2 case
standard relays slot P5, 3/4 case 1 TRM
+ 6 static outputs, slot P10, 3/4 case 2 TRM
48-60VDC slot P7, 1/1 case 2 TRM
slot P13.
SOM Static output 1MRK002614-CA T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
module, 12
outputs; 6
standard relays
+ 6 static outputs,
110-250VDC
Selected

ABB 137
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Table 230. Station communication, remote end serial communication and time synchronization selection

Station communication, remote end Ordering no Selection Notes and rules


serial communication and time
synchronization
Slot position (front view/rear view) The maximum number

P30:1/X301

P30:2/X302

P30:3/X303

P30:4/X304

P30:5/X305

P30:6/X306

P30:6:1/X3061

P30:6:2/X3062

P31:1/X311

P31:2/X312

P31:3/X313

P32:2/X322

P32:3/X323

LDCM mode
and type of LDCM
modules supported
depend on the total
amount of I/O and
communication modules
in the IED.
Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 case █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
with 1 TRM
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
with 2 TRM
No communication board included X X X X X X X X X X X X
Optical Ethernet SFP 1MRK005500-AA K K K K K K Optical Ethernet SFP is
basic in P30:1. P30:6:1
and P30:6:2 require the
Optical Ethernet module
in P30:6.
Optical Ethernet module 1MRK002266-EA H
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-AB L
60870-5-103 plastic interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-BB M
60870-5-103 plastic/glass interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-CB N
60870-5-103 glass interface
Galvanic RS485 communication 1MRK002309-AA G G G G
module
Optical short range LDCM 1MRK002122-AB A A A A A A Max 2 LDCMs can be
ordered.
Optical medium range LDCM, 1310 1MRK002311-AA B B B B B B
Always place LDCM
nm
modules on the same
Optical long range LDCM, 1550 nm 1MRK002311-BA C C C C C C board to support
redundant
communication: in P30:5
and P30:6, P31:2 and
P31:3 or P32:2 and
P32:3.
Line data communication, default — X Default if no LDCM is
64kbps mode selected
Allow line data communication in 1MRK007002-AA Y
2Mbps mode
GPS time module 1MRK002282-AB S S S S
IRIG-B time synchronization module 1MRK002305-AA F F F F
Selected K

138 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

26. Ordering for pre-configured IED

Guidelines
Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.
Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.
PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.

To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the tables, as given in the example below.
Example code: REL670 *2.2-A41X00- X00B05-B1X0-AC-CA-B-A6X0-CL1AB1RGN1N1XXXXXXX-KKKXXHKKLAGXSY. Using the code of each position #1-11 specified
as REL670*1-2 2-3-4 4-5 6-7 7-8-9 9 9-10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10-11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
# 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 -
REL670* 2.2 - X00 - - - - - - -

10 - 11
-

Position
SOFTWARE #1 Notes and rules
Version number
Version no. 2.2
Selection for position #1

Configuration alternatives Ordering no #2 Notes and rules


Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, isolated or high impedance earthed systems 1MRK004003-EG A41
Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping 1MRK004003-FG A42
Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping 1MRK004003-GG B42
Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, with PMU 1MRK004003-HG D42
ACT configuration
ABB standard configuration X00
Selection for
position #2

Software options Ordering no #3 Notes and rules


No option X00 All fields in the ordering form do
not need to be filled in
High impedance differential protection - 3 blocks 1MRK004001-AB A02 Only for A42/B42/D42
Phase segregated scheme communication 1MRK004001-BE B05
Pole slip protection 1MRK004001-VU B24 Only for A42/B42/D42
Stub protection 1MRK004001-VK B27 Only for B42. One block included
as basic.
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection 1MRK004001-CT C16 Only for A42/B42/D42
Directional power protection 1MRK004001-VM C39 Only for A42/B42/D42
Overexcitation protection - 2 winding 1MRK004001-DC D03
Frequency protection - line 1MRK004001-ED E04 One block included as basic
General current and voltage protection 1MRK004001-FA F01 Only for A42/B42/D42
Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference 1MRK004001-HC G03
Autorecloser - 1 circuit breaker 1MRK004001-GD H04 Only for A42/D42. One block
included as basic.
Autorecloser - 2 circuit breakers 1MRK004001-GE H05 Only for B42. Two blocks included
as basic.
Control functionality for up to 10 objects 1MRK004001-GW H37 Only for A41/A42/D42
Control functionality for up to 15 objects 1MRK004001-GY H38 Only for B42
IEC 62439-3 parallel redundancy protocol 1MRK004001-PP P23 Options P23 and P24 require two
SFPs placed in pairs.
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 1MRK004001-PR P24
IEC 61850-9-2 Process Bus communication, 8 merging units 1MRK004001-PT P30
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors 1MRK004001-PV P32 Only for A41/A42/B42
Selection for
position #3

ABB 139
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Language Ordering no #4 Notes and rules


First local HMI user dialogue language
HMI language, English IEC 1MRK002930-AA B1
Additional local HMI user dialogue language
No additional HMI language X0
HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB A12
Selection for B1
position #4

Casing Ordering no #5 Notes and rules


1/2 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VA A
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VB B Only for A41
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VE C Only for A42/B42/D42
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VC D Only for A41
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VD E Only for A42/B42/D42
Selection for
position #5

Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front Ordering no #6 Notes and rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case or 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 1MRK002420-BB A Only for A20/B20
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRHGS6 1MRK002420-BA B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case 1MRK002420-CA C
Wall mounting kit 1MRK002420-DA D Wall mounting not recommended
with communication modules with
fibre connection
Flush mounting kit 1MRK002420-PA E
Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal 1MRK002420-NA F
Selection for
position #6

Power supply modules Ordering no #7 Notes and rules


Compression terminals 1MRK002960-GA C
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-HA R
Power supply module, 24-60 VDC 1MRK002239-AB A
Power supply module, 90-250 VDC 1MRK002239-BB B
Selection for
position #7

Human machine hardware interface Case size Ordering no #8 Notes and rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", IEC 1MRK000028-AA B
3/4 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-CA
1/1 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-BA
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", ANSI 1MRK000028-AB C
3/4 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-CB
1/1 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-BB
Selection for
position #8

140 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Analog system Ordering no #9 Notes and rules


When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug).
Slot position (front view/rear view)

P40/X401

P41/X411
No Transformer input module included X0 X0 Only valid if IEC 61850-9-2
Process bus communication is
selected.
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BG A3 Only for A42/B42/D42
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BH A4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BK A5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AG A6 A6 Second TRM only for
A42/B42/D42
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AH A7 A7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DG A8 Only for A42/B42/D42
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DH A9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AP A12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AR A13
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AE A16 A16 As a first TRM, only for A41/A42/
D42; as a second TRM only for
A42/D42
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BC B3 Only for A42/B42/D42
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BD B4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BF B5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AC B6 B6
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AD B7 B7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DC B8
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DD B9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AS B12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AT B13
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AF B16 B16 Only for A42/D42
Selection for
position #9

ABB 141
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Binary input/ Ordering no #10 Notes and rules


output modules
For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used.
Note: 1 BIM and 1 BOM required in positions P3 and P4 in REL A42, B42 and D42. B42 requires one extra BIM in position P5. 1 IOM required in position P3 in A41.
Slot position (front

P3/X31

P4/X41

P5/X51

P6/X61

P7/X71

P8/X81

P9/X91

P10/X101

P11/X111

P12/X121

P13/X131

P14/X141

P15/X151

P16/X161
view/rear view)

1/2 case with 1 TRM █ █ █ These black marks


indicate the maximum
3/4 case with 1 TRM █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
number of modules per
3/4 case with 2 TRM █ █ █ █ █ casing type and the slots
1/1 case with 1 TRM █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ that can be occupied.

1/1 case with 2 TRM █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █


Compression 1MRK002960-KA C
terminals
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output 1MRK000614-AB A A A A A A A A A A A A A Maximum 4 (BOM+SOM
module 24 output +MIM) boards
relays (BOM)
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-DD B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-AD C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-BD D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CD E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CE E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
RL220,
220-250VDC,
120mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-HA F F F F F F F F F F F F F
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-EA G G G G G G G G G G G G G
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-FA H H H H H H H H H H H H H
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-GA K K K K K K K K K K K K K
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-GD L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
10+2 outputs,
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-AE M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1
10+2 outputs,
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-BE N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
10+2 outputs,
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-CE P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
142 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Binary input/ Ordering no #10 Notes and rules


output modules
For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used.
Note: 1 BIM and 1 BOM required in positions P3 and P4 in REL A42, B42 and D42. B42 requires one extra BIM in position P5. 1 IOM required in position P3 in A41.
IOM 8 inputs 10+2 1MRK000173-CF P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
outputs, RL220,
220-250VDC,
110mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-GC U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL24,
24-30VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-AD V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL48,
48-60VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-BD W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-CD Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
mA input module 1MRK000284-AB R R R R R R R R R R R R R MIM is not available for
MIM 6 channels A41. Maximum 1 MIM
board in 1/2 case
SOM Static output 1MRK002614-BA T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 SOM is not available for
module, 12 A41.
outputs; 6 SOM must not to be
standard relays placed in position
+ 6 static outputs, nearest to NUM: 1/2 case
48-60VDC slot P5, 3/4 case 2 TRM
slot P7, 1/1 case 2 TRM
SOM Static output 1MRK002614-CA T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
slot P13.
module, 12
outputs; 6
standard relays
+ 6 static outputs,
110-250VDC
Selection for C
position #10

ABB 143
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

Station communication, remote end Ordering no #11 Notes and rules


serial communication and time
synchronization
Slot position (front view/rear view) The maximum number

P30:1/X301

P30:2/X302

P30:3/X303

P30:4/X304

P30:5/X305

P30:6/X306

P30:6:1/X3061

P30:6:2/X3062

P31:1/X311

P31:2/X312

P31:3/X313

P32:2/X322

P32:3/X323

LDCM mode
and type of LDCM
modules supported
depend on the total
amount of I/O and
communication modules
in the IED.
Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 case █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
with 1 TRM
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
with 2 TRM
No communication board included X X X X X X X X X X X X
Optical Ethernet SFP 1MRK005500-AA K K K K K K Optical Ethernet SFP is
basic in P30:1. P30:6:1
and P30:6:2 require the
Optical Ethernet module
in P30:6.
Optical Ethernet module 1MRK002266-EA H
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-AB L
60870-5-103 plastic interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-BB M
60870-5-103 plastic/glass interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-CB N
60870-5-103 glass interface
Galvanic RS485 communication 1MRK002309-AA G G G G
module
Optical short range LDCM 1MRK002122-AB A A A A A A Max 2 LDCMs can be
ordered. Always place
Optical medium range, LDCM 1310 1MRK002311-AA B B B B B B
LDCM modules on the
nm
same board to support
Optical long range, LDCM 1550 nm 1MRK002311-BA C C C C C C redundant
communication: P30:5,
P30:6, P31:3 or P32:2
and P32:3.
Line data communication, default — X Default if no LDCM is
64kbps mode selected
Allow line data communication in 1MRK007002-AA Y
2Mbps mode
GPS time module 1MRK002282-AB S S S S
IRIG-B time synchronization module 1MRK002305-AA F F F F
Selection for K
position #11

144 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

27. Ordering for Accessories

Accessories
GPS antenna and mounting details

GPS antenna, including mounting kits Quantity: 1MRK 001 640-AA

Cable for antenna, 20 m (Appx. 65 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-AA

Cable for antenna, 40 m (Appx. 131 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-BA

Interface converter (for remote end data communication)

External interface converter from C37.94 (64kbps) to G703 Quantity: 1 2


1MRK 002 245-AA

External interface converter from C37.94 (64kbps/2Mbps) to G703.E1 Quantity: 1 2


1MRK 002 245-BA

Test switch Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internal neutral on


The test system COMBITEST intended for use with the IEDs is current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-BE).
described in 1MRK 512 001-BEN and 1MRK 001024-CA.
Please refer to the website: www.abb.com/protection-control Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with external neutral
for detailed information. on current circuit (ordering number RK926 315-BV).

Due to the high flexibility of our product and the wide variety of The normally open "In test mode" contact 29-30 on the RTXP
applications possible the test switches needs to be selected for test switches should be connected to the input of the test
each specific application. function block to allow activation of functions individually during
testing.
Select your suitable test switch base on the available contacts
arrangements shown in the reference documentation. Test switches type RTXP 24 is ordered separately. Please refer
to Section Related documents for references to corresponding
However our proposals for suitable variants are; documents.

Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internal neutral RHGS 6 Case or RHGS 12 Case with mounted RTXP 24 and the
on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-AK). on/off switch for dc-supply are ordered separately. Please refer
to Section Related documents for references to corresponding
Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with external neutral documents.
on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-AC).
Protection cover

Protective cover for rear side of RHGS6, 6U, 1/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AE

Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/2 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-TA

Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 3/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-SA

Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/1 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-RA

ABB 145
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

External resistor unit

High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 20-100V, 1ph Quantity: 1 2 3
RK 795 101-MA

High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 20-100V, 3ph Quantity: RK 795 101-MB

High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 100-400V, 1ph Quantity: 1 2 3
RK 795 101-CB

High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 100-400V, 3ph Quantity: RK 795 101-DC

Combiflex

Key switch for settings

Key switch for lock-out of settings via LHMI Quantity: 1MRK 000 611-A

Note: To connect the key switch, leads with 10 A Combiflex socket on one end must be used.

Mounting kit Ordering number


Side-by-side mounting kit Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-Z

Configuration and monitoring tools

Front connection cable between LHMI and PC Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-CA

LED Label special paper A4, 1 pc Quantity: 1MRK 002 038-CA

LED Label special paper Letter, 1 pc Quantity: 1MRK 002 038-DA

Manuals

Note: One (1) IED Connect USB flash drive containing user documentation (Operation manual, Technical
manual, Installation manual, Commissioning manual, Application manual and Getting started guide),
Connectivity packages and LED label template is always included for each IED.

Rule: Specify additional quantity of IED Connect USB flash drive requested. Quantity: 1MRK 002 290-AE

146 ABB
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

User documentation
Rule: Specify the number of printed manuals requested
Application manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 506 369-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 506 369-UUS

Technical manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 506 370-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 506 370-UUS

Commissioning manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 506 371-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 506 371-UUS

Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 392-UEN

Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 393-UEN

Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 394-UEN

Communication protocol manual, LON IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 395-UEN

Communication protocol manual, SPA IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 396-UEN

Communication protocol manual, DNP ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 511 391-UUS

Point list manual, DNP ANSI Quantity 1MRK 511 397-UUS

Operation manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 500 127-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 500 127-UUS

Installation manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 514 026-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 514 026-UUS

Engineering manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 398-UEN

ABB 147
1MRK 506 372-BEN -
Line distance protection REL670 2.2
Product version: 2.2

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 511 398-UUS

Cyber security deployment guideline IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 399-UEN

Application guide, Communication set-up IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 382-UEN

Reference information

For our reference and statistics we would be pleased to be provided with the following application data:

Country: End user:

Station name: Voltage level: kV

Related documents
670 series manuals Document numbers

Documents related to REL670 Document numbers Operation manual IEC:1MRK 500 127-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 500 127-UUS
Application manual IEC:1MRK 506 369-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 506 369-UUS Engineering manual IEC:1MRK 511 398-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 511 398-UUS
Commissioning manual IEC:1MRK 506 371-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 506 371-UUS Installation manual IEC:1MRK 514 026-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 514 026-UUS
Product guide 1MRK 506 372-BEN
Communication protocol manual, 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Technical manual IEC:1MRK 506 370-UEN DNP3
ANSI:1MRK 506 370-UUS
Communication protocol manual, 1MRK 511 394-UEN
Type test certificate IEC:1MRK 506 372-TEN IEC 60870-5-103
ANSI:1MRK 506 372-TUS
Communication protocol manual, 1MRK 511 392-UEN
IEC 61850 Edition 1

Communication protocol manual, 1MRK 511 393-UEN


IEC 61850 Edition 2

Communication protocol manual, 1MRK 511 395-UEN


LON

Communication protocol manual, 1MRK 511 396-UEN


SPA

Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS

Accessories guide IEC:1MRK 514 012-BEN


ANSI:1MRK 514 012-BUS

Cyber security deployment 1MRK 511 399-UEN


guideline

Connection and Installation 1MRK 513 003-BEN


components

Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

Application guide, Communication 1MRK 505 382-UEN


set-up

148 ABB
149

ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00

abb.com/protection-control
1MRK 506 372-BEN

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved.


Specifications subject to change without notice.

You might also like